Honda - CR-V - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2007

2007 CR-V Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year. AOM 35059 © 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SWA6031 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００１ Owner’s Identification This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. OWNER This owner’s manual covers all models of the CR-V. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular vehicle. ADDRESS STREET CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE V. I. N. DELIVERY DATE The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever. (Date sold to original retail purchaser) DEALER NAME DEALER NO. ADDRESS STREET CITY OWNER’S SIGNATURE DEALER’S SIGNATURE STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire de commander le numéro de pièce 33SWAC00 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００２ Introduction Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda CR-V was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. i ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００３ Introduction California Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to the vehicle owner. ii ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００４ A Few Words About Safety Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement. You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: Safety Labels − on the vehicle. and one of Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety. Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it carefully. iii ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：４８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００５ Important Handling Information Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 228 of this manual and the Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 252 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of control or an accident. iv ０６／０７／０５ １２：０６：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００６ Contents Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3 Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5 Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, information display, dashboard, and steering column) ................ 57 Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security and cruise control) ......................................... 123 Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 213 Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 227 Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 255 Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ................................................ 297 Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls) ....................................... 319 Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 333 Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 337 Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page 1 INDEX Index ................................................................................................................................................. I ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００７ Overview of Contents Contents A convenient reference to the sections in this manual. Your Vehicle at a Glance A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle. Driver and Passenger Safety Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicle’s seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints. Instruments and Controls Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column. Features How to operate the heating and air conditioning system, the audio system, and other convenience features. 2 Before Driving What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park; plus what you need to know if you’re planning to tow a trailer. Maintenance The maintenance minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service. There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them. Taking Care of the Unexpected This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them. Technical Information ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index Service Information Summary A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：２０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００８ Your Vehicle at a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59) GAUGES (P.66) AUDIO SYSTEM (P.129) MIRROR CONTROL (P.109) Your Vehicle at a Glance DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG (P.9, 25) PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG (P.9, 25) POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCHES (P.82) HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS (P.124) POWER WINDOW SWITCHES (P.106) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.231) FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.215) HOOD RELEASE HANDLE (P.217) ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.117) U.S. EX-L without navigation system is shown. 3 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０００９ Your Vehicle at a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS (P.75) HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P.76) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.32) REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS＊2 (P.203) AUDIO SYSTEM (P.160) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM ON/OFF SWITCH (P.241) WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS (P.73) MIRROR CONTROLS (P.109) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON＊2 (P.77) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P.78) PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.78) HORN＊1 VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES＊3 CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P.209) ＊1 : ＊2 : ＊3 : 4 AUDIO SYSTEM (P.129) CLOCK (P.206) To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped. Refer to the navigation system manual. SHIFT LEVER (P.231) SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊2 (P.105) ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１０ Driver and Passenger Safety Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 5. Fasten and Position the Seat Belts .............................. 14 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Position ................................. 15 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts ........................ 18 Seat Belt System Components ... 18 Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................................ 20 Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 Additional Information About Your Airbags ............................ 22 Airbag System Components ....... 22 How Your Front Airbags Work.......................................... 25 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work ........................... 30 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 31 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works ....................... 31 How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works ................ 32 Airbag Service .............................. 33 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Protecting Children − General Guidelines ................................. 34 All Children Must Be Restrained ................................ 34 All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat .................................. 35 The Passenger’s Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35 If You Must Drive with Several Children .................................... 37 If a Child Requires Close Attention ................................... 37 Additional Safety Precautions .... 37 Protecting Infants and Small Children .................................... 39 Protecting Infants ........................ 39 Protecting Small Children .......... 40 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42 With LATCH ................................ 43 With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 46 With a Tether ............................... 48 Protecting Larger Children ............ 50 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 50 Using a Booster Seat ................... 51 When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front .......................................... 52 Additional Safety Precautions .... 53 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54 Safety Labels .................................... 55 5 Driver and Passenger Safety This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１１ Important Safety Precautions You’ll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important. Always Wear Your Seat Belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page 14 ). Restrain All Children Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat (see pages 34 − 53 ). Be Aware of Airbag Hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. Don’t Drink and Drive Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with 6 every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either. Control Your Speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted. Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page 257 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：０７：５１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１２ Your Vehicle’s Safety Features (3) (4) (10) (1) (9) (7) Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash. (5) (8) (11) (12) (2) (6) (2) (1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (12) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners However, you and your passengers can’t take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in a proper position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly. The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. 7 Driver and Passenger Safety Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash. (9) ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１３ Your Vehicle’s Safety Features Seat Belts Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions. Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. Why Wear Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.) Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts. 8 Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. When properly worn, seat belts: Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicle’s built-in safety features. Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including frontal, side, and rear impacts and rollovers. Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants. Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle. Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag. Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury. What You Should Do: Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１４ Your Vehicle’s Safety Features Airbags Driver and Passenger Safety Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page 25 for more information on how your front airbags work). Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page 28 for more information on how your side airbags work). In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact or rollover (see page 30 for more information on how your side curtain airbags work). CONTINUED 9 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１５ Your Vehicle’s Safety Features The most important things you need to know about your airbags are: Airbags do not replace seat belts. They are designed to supplement the seat belts. Airbags offer no protection in rear impacts, or minor frontal or side collisions. Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly. 10 What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible. The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety. Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１６ Protecting Adults and Teens See pages 34 − 53 for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle. 1.Close and Lock the Doors After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Your vehicle has a door and tailgate open monitor on the instrument panel to indicate when a specific door or the tailgate is not tightly closed. 2.Adjust the Front Seats Driver and Passenger Safety Introduction The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers, and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front. Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out. Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop. See page 82 for how to lock the doors, and page 63 for how the door and tailgate open monitor works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible. Your vehicle has the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page 84 . CONTINUED 11 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１７ Protecting Adults and Teens If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page 78 ). If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. 12 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible. Once your seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure the seat is locked in position. See page 94 for how to adjust the front seats. Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel. Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright position. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１８ Protecting Adults and Teens 4.Adjust the Head Restraints Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. See page 94 for how to adjust the seat-backs. Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving. Adjust the driver’s head restraint so the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint. Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries. See page 97 for how to adjust the head restraints. Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible. 13 Driver and Passenger Safety Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０８：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００１９ Protecting Adults and Teens This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body. 5.Fasten and Position the Seat Belts Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash. The seat belt in the center position of the back seat can be unlatched and retracted to allow the back seat to be folded up or down. This seat belt should be latched whenever the seat-back is in an upright position. See page 104 for how to unlatch and relatch the seat belt. Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. 14 If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２０ Protecting Adults and Teens RELEASE BUTTONS Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash. No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt. Using a seat The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release buttons, and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions). belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible. See page 18 for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. CONTINUED 15 Driver and Passenger Safety very serious injuries in a crash. 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２１ Protecting Adults and Teens In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag. Advice for Pregnant Women This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag. Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor. 16 When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible. If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it’s okay for you to drive. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２２ Protecting Adults and Teens Additional Safety Precautions could be very seriously injured in a crash. Passengers should not stand up or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle. Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers. If your could be very seriously injured in a crash. hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbag inflates. Do not put any accessories on seat belts. Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate. Do not attach hard objects on or near a door. If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone. 17 Driver and Passenger Safety Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２３ Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Seat Belt System Components Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all five seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. This system uses the same sensors as the front airbags to monitor whether the front seat belts are latched or unlatched, and how much weight is on the front passenger’s seat (see pages 27 and 28 ). The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before 18 the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on. If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals. When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound. If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the driver’s seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove: Any items under the front passenger’s seat. Any objects hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. Any objects, such as a folded-down back seat, that are touching the rear of the seat-back. If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：３２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２４ Additional Information About Your Seat Belts To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page 14 for how to properly position the belt). To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door. All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body. DETACHABLE SEAT BELT The seat belts in all positions except the driver’s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page 46 ). If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely. To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed. The lap/shoulder belt in the center seating position on the rear seat is equipped with a detachable seat belt that has two parts: a small latch plate and an anchor buckle. The detachable seat belt should normally be latched whenever the seat-backs are in an upright position. For more information about the detachable seat belt, see page 104 . 19 Driver and Passenger Safety Lap/Shoulder Belt The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２５ Additional Information About Your Seat Belts Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to activate in any collision severe enough to cause the front airbags to deploy, or if a sensor detects your vehicle is about to roll over (see page 30 ). If a side airbag or side curtain airbag deploys during a side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle will also deploy. For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position. 20 The tensioners can also be activated during a collision in which the front airbags do not deploy. In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful. When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until they are unbuckled. Seat Belt Maintenance For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly. Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page 283 ). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. Honda provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your Honda Warranty Information booklet for details. ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：４６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２６ Additional Information About Your Seat Belts The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced. Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Driver and Passenger Safety If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by your dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Check your seat belts regularly, and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. 21 ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：５１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２７ Additional Information About Your Airbags Airbag System Components (12) (1) (2) (8) (10) (11) (5) (4) (3) (1) Driver’s Front Airbag (2) Passenger’s Front Airbag (3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (5) Side Airbags (6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (9) Side Impact Sensors (First) (10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors (11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit/OPDS Sensors Control Unit (12) SRS Indicator (13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 22 (7) (5) (9) (6) (4) (13) ０６／０７／０５ １２：０９：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２８ Additional Information About Your Airbags Your airbag system includes: (14) Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ). (15) (14) Front Crash Sensors (15) Side Impact Sensor (Second) (16) Side Curtain Airbags Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ). CONTINUED 23 Driver and Passenger Safety Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ). (16) ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００２９ Additional Information About Your Airbags Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page 20 ). Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact, side impact, or if your vehicle is about to rollover. Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passenger’s side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page 29 ). A driver’s seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see page 27 ). Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passenger’s seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passenger’s front airbag will be 24 turned off (see page 27 ). Sensors that can detect whether the driver’s seat belt and a front passenger’s seat belt is latched or unlatched (see page 18 ). A rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags and front seat belt tensioners (see page 30 ). A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passenger’s side airbag has been turned off (see page 31 ). An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, or seat belt tensioners (see page 31 ). Emergency backup power in case your vehicle’s electrical system is disconnected in a crash. An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off (see page 32 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３０ Additional Information About Your Airbags How Your Front Airbags Work Driver and Passenger Safety During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest. Although both airbags normally inflate within split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will instantly inflate the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags, at the time and with the force needed. Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passenger’s airbag off (see page 27 ). After inflating, the front airbags immediately deflate, so they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls. CONTINUED 25 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３１ Additional Information About Your Airbags The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps. After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag’s surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. 26 Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags Your front airbags are dual-stage airbags. This means they have two inflation stages that can be ignited sequentially or simultaneously, depending on crash severity. Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this feature have two deployment thresholds that depend on whether sensors detect the occupant is wearing a seat belt or not. In a more severe crash, both stages will ignite simultaneously to provide the quickest and greatest protection. In a less severe crash, one stage will ignite first, then the second stage will ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time with a little less force. If the occupant’s belt is not latched, the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the occupant would need extra protection. If the occupant’s belt is latched, the airbag will inflate at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：３２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３２ Additional Information About Your Airbags Advanced Airbags For both advanced airbags to work properly: Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any objects or metal items under the front seats. Back-seat passengers should not put their feet under the front seats. Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly. DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR The driver’s advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact. If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the driver’s seating position. PASSENGER’S SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS The passenger’s advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Honda does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. CONTINUED 27 Driver and Passenger Safety Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and children who ride in front. ０６／０７／０５ １７：１８：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３３ Additional Information About Your Airbags Be aware that objects placed on the passenger’s seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off. Moving the front seat forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it. When the airbag is turned off, a ‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page 32 ). Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket. If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag will be off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator will not come on. To ensure that the passenger’s advanced front airbag system will work properly, do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passenger’s seat. This includes: A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat. 28 How Your Side Airbags Work Moving the front seat or seat-back forcibly back against the folded rear seat. If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the driver’s or the passenger’s side airbag and activate the seat belt tensioner. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：４９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３４ Additional Information About Your Airbags To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats. Side Airbag Cutoff System Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passenger’s seat. Although Honda does not encourage children to ride in front, if sensors in the seat detect a child has leaned into the side airbag’s deployment path, the airbag will shut off. The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbag’s deployment path. If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page 31 ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbag’s deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out. There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off. A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly. Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off. 29 Driver and Passenger Safety Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１０：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３５ Additional Information About Your Airbags How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle. In a Rollover If the rollover sensor detects your vehicle is about to roll over, it signals the control unit, which immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners. In a Side Impact In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag and activate the seat belt tensioner on the driver’s or the passenger’s side of the vehicle. 30 The airbag on the passenger’s side will deploy, and the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are no passengers on that side of the vehicle. To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１１：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３６ Additional Information About Your Airbags If you see any of these indications, the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when you need them. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly. Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example: Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works U.S. Canada This indicator alerts you that the passenger’s side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go off (see page 61 ). If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked. If the indicator stays on after the engine starts. If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive. 31 Driver and Passenger Safety How the SRS Indicator Works The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem with your airbags or seat belt tensioners. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１１：１７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３７ Additional Information About Your Airbags How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR If no weight is detected on the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on. The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. U.S. Canada This indicator alerts you that the passenger’s front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passenger’s seat. It does not mean there is a problem with the airbag. 32 If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly. If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove: Any items under the front passenger’s seat. Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. Any object, such as a folded-down back seat, that is touching the rear of the seat-back. If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１１：２６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３８ Additional Information About Your Airbags An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced. Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop. The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly. If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact. Even if your Do not expose the front passenger’s seat-back to liquid. If water or airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the driver’s seat position sensor, the front passenger’s weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts worn during the crash to make sure they are operating properly. another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly. Additional Safety Precautions Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting your dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact. seat belts provide the best protection. Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer. This could make the Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason. Tampering could cause driver’s seat position sensor or the front passenger’s weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Honda Automobile Customer Service at (800) 999-1009. the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury. 33 Driver and Passenger Safety Airbag Service Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if: ０６／０７／０５ １２：１１：３４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００３９ Protecting Children − General Guidelines All Children Must Be Restrained Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of the death of children aged 12 and under. Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to properly protect child passengers. If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children. 34 To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle (see pages 39 − 49 ). Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary. Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits them properly (see pages 50 − 53 ). ０６／０７／０５ １７：１８：３８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４０ Protecting Children − General Guidelines Children who ride in back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back. The Passenger’s Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passenger’s front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries. Even though your vehicle has an advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passenger’s front airbag off (see page 31 ), please follow these guidelines: Infants Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s front airbag. If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant. Small Children Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s front airbag can be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child. Larger Children Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passenger’s front airbag. Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page 50 for important information about protecting larger children). CONTINUED 35 Driver and Passenger Safety All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１１：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４１ Protecting Children − General Guidelines To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. U.S. Models SUN VISORS Canadian Models SUN VISORS 36 DASHBOARD ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４２ Protecting Children − General Guidelines Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page 50 ). Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page 94 ). Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page 15 ). Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page 14 ). If a Child Requires Close Attention Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention. Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk. If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in a back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front. Additional Safety Precautions Never hold an infant or child on your lap. If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed. Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. Never let two children use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. CONTINUED 37 Driver and Passenger Safety If You Must Drive with Several Children Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４３ Protecting Children − General Guidelines Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured. (See pages 46 and 47 for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.) Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors. This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page 88 ). 38 Do not leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children without Lock all doors and the tailgate when your vehicle is not in use. adult supervision is illegal in most states and Canadian provinces, and can be very hazardous. Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring themselves or others. Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters out of the reach of children. Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch, and open the tailgate, which can lead to accidental injury or death. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４４ Protecting Infants and Small Children Protecting Infants Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position. If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision. Child Seat Type An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old. Rear-facing Child Seat Placement A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat. If the passenger’s front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant. When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a baby’s head, neck, and back. CONTINUED 39 Driver and Passenger Safety Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：３１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４５ Protecting Infants and Small Children In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat. Protecting Small Children Child Seat Placement We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front. Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passenger’s airbag can be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too Child Seat Type Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front. A child who is at least one year old, and who fits within the child seat maker’s weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat. Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown. 40 We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat. far forward, or the child’s head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４６ Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat. Selecting a Child Seat When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system. Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into each rear seating position in the back seat. In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt. Whatever type of seat you choose, to provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements: 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates. If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child. Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style. 2. The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child. Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children. We also recommend selecting a LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid, rather than a flexible, anchor (see page 44 ). CONTINUED 41 Driver and Passenger Safety Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off (see page 32 ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：４９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４７ Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used. Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used. Installing a Child Seat After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat: 1. Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle. All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash. 2. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured. After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure. A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side 42 movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seat’s effectiveness. If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured. 3. Secure the child in the child seat. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat maker’s instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash. The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１２：５９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４８ Installing a Child Seat The five lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH. The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point. BUTTON LOWER ANCHORS FOR CENTER LATCH Using the Outer LATCH Driver and Passenger Safety Installing a Child Seat with LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) at the rear seats to secure a child seat in any seating position: one in each outer seating position, or one in the center. LOWER ANCHORS FOR OUTER LATCH When you install a child seat in the rear center seating position, use the center lower anchors as shown in the illustration. To install a child seat in either outer seating position, use the outer lower anchors. You can install up to two child seats at a time using the outer lower anchors. Do not attach two child seat connectors to a single lower anchor at a time. OUTER LOWER ANCHORS To install a LATCH-compatible child seat in either of the rear outer seats: 1. Store the seat belt buckle or tongue in the storage pockets. 2. Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors. CONTINUED 43 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００４９ Installing a Child Seat Rigid type 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat maker’s instructions. Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above. Flexible type Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above. 4. Whatever type you have, follow the child seat maker’s instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit. 5. Remove the head restraint (see page 97 ). Make sure the removed head restraint is secured in the cargo area. Reinstall the head restraint when the child seat is removed. 6. If equipped Remove the dual deck cargo shelf (see page 111 ). 44 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：１９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５０ Installing a Child Seat TETHER ANCHOR Using the Center LATCH TETHER ANCHOR TETHER ANCHOR TETHER STRAP HOOK CENTER LOWER ANCHORS 8. Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions. 9. Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure. 10. Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf. COVER To install a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seating position, use the center lower anchors as shown above. 1. Follow step 1 through 5 as described previously to secure the child seat. 2. Pull down the cover to access the tether anchor. TETHER STRAP HOOK 3. Route the tether strap over the seat-back, then attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchor in the ceiling, making sure the strap is not twisted. Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions. 4. Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure. 45 Driver and Passenger Safety 7. Route the tether strap over the seat-back, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the tether strap is not twisted. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５１ Installing a Child Seat Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt. In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the driver’s have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat. If you intend to install a child seat in the center seating position of the rear seat, make sure the detachable seat belt anchor is securely latched (see page 104 ). 1. With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat maker’s instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle. 2. To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps. 46 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５２ Installing a Child Seat 4. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure. 5. Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps. To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt. 47 Driver and Passenger Safety To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５３ Installing a Child Seat Installing a Child Seat with a Tether A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat. Using an Outer Anchor ANCHOR ANCHOR Each rear outside seating position has an anchorage point on the seatback, and the center seating position has an anchorage point in the ceiling near the tailgate. Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available. 48 TETHER STRAP HOOK 1. On vehicles with the dual deck cargo shelf, remove it (see page 111 ). 3. Attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the tether strap is not twisted. 2. After properly securing the child seat (see page 46 ), remove the head restraint, then route the tether strap over the seat-back. Make sure to store the removed head restraint in the cargo area and to reinstall it when the child seat is removed. 4. Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions. 5. Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５４ Installing a Child Seat Using the Center Anchor TETHER ANCHOR 1. Remove the rear center head restraint, and store it in the cargo area. 2. After properly securing the child seat (see page 46 ), open the anchor cover. Driver and Passenger Safety COVER TETHER ANCHOR TETHER STRAP HOOK 3. Route the tether strap over the seat-back, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the tether strap is not twisted. 4. Tighten the strap according to the seat maker’s instructions. 49 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１３：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５５ Protecting Larger Children When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder belt. Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front. If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly. Checking Seat Belt Fit To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself: 1. Does the child sit all the way back against the seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat? 50 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１４：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５６ Protecting Larger Children 3. Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm? Using a Booster Seat 5. Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page 41 ) and that you follow the booster seat maker’s instructions. A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster. If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly. CONTINUED 51 Driver and Passenger Safety 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs? Some states and Canadian provinces also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend to drive. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１４：１７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５７ Protecting Larger Children A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicle’s or booster’s seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat. When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. If the passenger’s front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position. 52 A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger child’s body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries. Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider. Physical Size Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages 14 and 50 ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front. Maturity To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride. If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to: Carefully read the owner’s manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information. Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position. Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor. Check that the child’s seat belt is properly and securely positioned. Supervise the child. Even a mature child sometimes needs to be reminded to fasten the seat belt or sit properly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１４：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５８ Protecting Larger Children Additional Safety Precautions Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck. This could result Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm. This could improve a child’s comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. Driver and Passenger Safety in serious neck injuries during a crash. Do not put any accessories on a seat belt. Devices intended to cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured. Two children should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. 53 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１４：３１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００５９ Carbon Monoxide Hazard Your vehicle’s exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page. Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever: Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. The vehicle is raised for an oil change. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust. The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the underside. 54 High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage. With the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system as shown below. If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the heating and cooling system as follows: 1. Select the fresh air mode. mode. 2. Select the 3. Turn the fan on high speed. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１４：４６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６０ Safety Labels If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement. SUN VISOR U.S. models Canadian models Driver and Passenger Safety These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. SUN VISOR U.S. models only DASHBOARD U.S. models only RADIATOR CAP CONTINUED 55 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６１ Safety Labels HOOD DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models Canadian models＊ ＊Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to read this owner’s manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle. DOORJAMBS U.S. models 56 Canadian models ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６２ Instruments and Controls This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach. Door Locks ....................................... 82 Power Door Locks ....................... 82 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 84 Childproof Door Locks ............... 88 Remote Transmitter ........................ 89 Tailgate ............................................. 92 Seats .................................................. 94 Seat Heaters ................................... 105 Power Windows ............................. 106 Moonroof ........................................ 107 Mirrors ............................................ 108 Interior Convenience Items .......... 110 Dual Deck Cargo Shelf ............. 111 Beverage Holders ...................... 113 Center Table .............................. 114 Lower Glove Box ....................... 114 Upper Glove Box ....................... 115 Vanity Mirror ............................. 115 Sun Visor .................................... 116 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 116 Conversation Mirror ................. 117 Accessory Power Sockets......... 117 Console Compartment .............. 118 Coat Hook ................................... 119 Seat Under Tray ........................ 119 Interior Lights ................................ 119 57 Instruments and Controls Control Locations ............................ 58 Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 60 Gauges .............................................. 66 Trip Meter .................................... 67 Current Fuel Mileage .................. 68 Average Fuel Mileage ................. 68 Range ............................................ 68 Odometer ...................................... 69 Fuel Gauge ................................... 69 Temperature Gauge .................... 69 Outside Temperature Indicator ................................... 69 Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 71 Maintenance Minder ................... 71 Controls Near the Steering Wheel ............................................ 72 Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 73 Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 74 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 75 Hazard Warning Button .................. 76 Rear Window Defogger .................. 77 Parking Brake .................................. 78 Steering Wheel Adjustments ......... 78 Keys and Locks ................................ 79 Immobilizer System......................... 80 Ignition Switch ................................. 81 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６３ Control Locations POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH (P.82) MIRROR CONTROLS (P.109) INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59) GAUGES (P.66) MOONROOF SWITCH＊ (P.107) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.32) HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P.76) AUDIO SYSTEM (P.129) CLOCK (P.206) POWER WINDOW SWITCHES (P.106) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.231) FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.215) HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS (P.124) HOOD RELEASE HANDLE (P.217) SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊ (P.105) PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.78) ＊ EX-L without navigation system is shown 58 ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.117) ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：２２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６４ Instrument Panel CRUISE CONTROL MAIN INDICATOR (P.62) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.310) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.63) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.63) LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.60, 309) CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60, 309) ＊ DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.63) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.61) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.62) SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.60) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.61) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR＊ (P.61) LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.64) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR＊ (P.60, 311) SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65, 207) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITOR (P.63) IMMOBILIZER TPMS SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.64) INDICATOR (P.61) The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text. 59 Instruments and Controls MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.65) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.62) VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.62) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.64) ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６５ Instrument Panel Indicators The instrument panel has many indicators that give you important information about your vehicle. Malfunction Indicator Lamp See page 310 . Low Oil Pressure Indicator The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running. For more information, see page 309 . Charging System Indicator If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged. For more information, see page 309 . 60 U.S. Canada Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator This indicator has two functions: 1. It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. A beeper sounds if you drive with the parking brake not fully released. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the brakes and tires. 2. If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the brake system. For more information, see page 311 . Seat Belt Reminder Indicator This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds, and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on. If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. ０６／０７／０５ １７：１８：４８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６６ Instrument Panel Indicators If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals. For more information, see page 18 . Canada Side Airbag Off Indicator This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passenger’s side airbag has automatically shut off. For more information, see page 31 . Immobilizer System Indicator This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have inserted a properly-coded ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink, and the engine’s fuel system will be disabled. (see page 80 ). Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by your dealer. With the indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no antilock. For more information, see page 238 . 61 Instruments and Controls Supplemental Restraint System Indicator This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your side airbags, passenger’s side airbag automatic cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners, driver’s seat position sensor, or the front passenger’s weight sensors. For more information, see page 31 . U.S. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１５：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６７ Instrument Panel Indicators Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or if it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. See page 240 for more information on the VSA system. 62 VSA Activation Indicator This indicator has three functions: 1. It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system. Cruise Control Indicator This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page 209 for information on operating the cruise control. Cruise Main Indicator 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see page 240 ). 3. It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system. This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. See page 240 for more information on the VSA system. This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button (see page 209 ). ０６／０８／１１ １８：０８：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６８ Instrument Panel Indicators High Beam Indicator When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash. This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page 75 . This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page 75 ). Daytime Running Lights Indicator If this indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake, it means there is a problem with the DRL. There may also be a problem with the high beam headlights. Have your vehicle checked by your dealer. This indicator comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. When the indicator comes on, there is about 2.3 US gal (8.6 ) of fuel remaining in the tank before the reading reaches E. There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading does reach E. Door and Tailgate Open Monitor The appropriate indicator comes on in this display if the tailgate or any door is not closed tightly. 63 Instruments and Controls Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see page 279 ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling. Low Fuel Indicator ０６／０７／０５ １２：１６：１２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００６９ Instrument Panel Indicators Low Tire Pressure Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition to the ON (II) position. If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicle’s tires are extremely low on pressure. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost the pressure, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, replace the flat tire with the compact spare (see page 298 ), and have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service (see page 317 ). Refer to page 242 for more information. 64 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on and stays on at any other time, or if it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the TPMS. With this indicator on, the low tire pressure indicator will not come on when a tire loses pressure. Take the vehicle to your dealer to have the system checked. Lights On Indicator This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the or position. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position without turning off the light switch, this indicator will stay on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the driver’s door. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１６：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７０ Instrument Panel Indicators Washer Level Indicator Canadian models only This indicator goes off when your dealer resets it after completing the required maintenance service. Security System Indicator SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Instruments and Controls This indicator comes on when the washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid when you see this indicator (see page 272 ). Maintenance Minder Indicator This indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. The maintenance main items and sub items will be displayed in the information display. See page 257 for more information on the maintenance minder. If equipped This indicator comes on when the security system is set. See page 207 for more information on the security system. 65 ０６／０７／０７ １１：３８：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７１ Gauges INFORMATION DISPLAY OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/ CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE TACHOMETER TRIP METER FUEL GAUGE 66 TEMPERATURE GAUGE SELECT/RESET KNOB ０６／０７／０５ １２：１６：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７２ Gauges Trip Meter This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the meter you last selected is displayed. The information display consists of three segments. The upper segment displays current fuel mileage, the second segment displays the odometer, average fuel mileage, range (estimated distance), engine oil life, and the lower segment displays the trip meter, and maintenance item code(s). To switch the display, press and release the Select/Reset knob repeatedly. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position the last selection is displayed. To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the Select/Reset knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. 67 Instruments and Controls There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Switch between these displays by pressing the Select/ Reset knob repeatedly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１６：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７３ Gauges Current Fuel Mileage Current Fuel Mileage Average Fuel Mileage When either of the trip meters (trip A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s average fuel mileage since you last reset that trip meter can be shown on the information display (mpg on U.S. models and l/100 km on Canadian models). This number is updated once per 10 seconds. To see the average fuel mileage, press and release the Select/Reset knob repeatedly. U.S. model is shown This display shows the current, or instant fuel mileage you are getting. It shows the number of mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). 68 When you reset a trip meter, the average fuel mileage for that trip meter also resets. Range (Estimated Distance) This display shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you have achieved over the last few miles (kilometers), so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic condition, etc. ０６／０７／０７ １７：１７：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７４ Gauges Fuel Gauge This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. Temperature Gauge This shows the temperature of the engine’s coolant. During normal operation, the reading should be in the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the reading may reach near the red mark. If it reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. See page 307 for instructions and precautions on checking the engine’s cooling system. Outside Temperature Indicator OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR If equipped This indicator displays the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. models) or Centigrade (Canadian models). Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter. CONTINUED 69 Instruments and Controls Odometer The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７５ Gauges The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Therefore, the temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). The sensor delays the display update until it reaches the correct outside temperature. This may take several minutes. If the outside temperature is incorrectly displayed, you can adjust it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in Canadian models) warmer or cooler. NOTE: The temperature must be stabilized before doing this procedure. 70 When it reaches the desired value, push the Select/Reset knob to enter the setting. You should see the new outside temperature displayed. In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface. To adjust the outside temperature display, press and hold the Select/ Reset knob for 10 seconds. The display changes as shown above. Select the outside temperature indicator by turning the Select/Reset knob. The display begins to blink, push the same knob to enter this setting, then turn it to adjust the temperature. The following sequence will appear for each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada). ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：０５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７６ Gauges Maintenance Minder The information display in the instrument panel shows you the engine oil life and maintenance service items when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. This information helps to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 257 for more information. Instruments and Controls Check Fuel Cap Message If your fuel fill cap is loose or missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message appears on the information display after you start the engine. For more information, see page 216 . 71 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７７ Controls Near the Steering Wheel HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.74) INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS (P.75) WINDSHIELD WIPERS/ WASHERS (P.73) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM ON/OFF SWITCH (P.241) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.32) HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P.76) SHIFT LEVER (P.231) MIRROR CONTROL (P.109) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER (P.77) REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS＊2 (P.203) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P.78) CRUISE CONTROL BUTTON (P.209) HORN＊1 ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET (P.117) VOICE CONTROLS＊3 ＊1 : ＊2 : ＊3 : 72 PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.78) To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped. Refer to the navigation system manual. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：２２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７８ Windshield Wipers and Washers Windshield Wiper MIST − The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. OFF − The wipers are not activated. On all models except LX 1. MIST 2. OFF 3. INT − Intermittent 4. LO − Low speed 5. HI − High speed 6. Windshield washers Push the right lever up or down to select a position. The length of the wiper interval is varied automatically according to the vehicle’s speed. Vary the delay by turning the INT TIME ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay, the wipers change to low speed when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20km/h). LO − The wipers run at low speed. HI − The wipers run at high speed. 73 Instruments and Controls INT − The wipers operate every few seconds. At low speed and high speed, the wipers run continuously. Windshield Washers − Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete one more sweep after you release the lever. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：３２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００７９ Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights Rear Window Wiper and Washer 4. Rotate the switch counterclockwise also to spray the window washer and turn the wiper on. Turn Signal and Headlights When you shift the transmission to the reverse position with the front windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically even if the rear wiper switch is off. The rear window washer uses the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer. 1. OFF When you turn the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will return to its parked position. 2. Rotate the switch clockwise to turn the rear window wiper ON. The wiper operates every 7 seconds after completing two sweeps. 3. Hold past ON to activate the rear window wiper a few times and to spray the rear window washer. 74 1. Turn Signal 2. OFF 3. Parking and interior lights 4. Headlights on 5. High Beams 6. Flash high beams ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８０ Turn Signal and Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness Headlights − Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate light. Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the headlights. If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder chime when you open the driver’s door. High Beams − Push the lever forward and the high beam indicator will come on (see page 63 ). Pull it back to return to low beams. Instrument Panel Brightness To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back. Daytime Running Lights With the headlight switch in the off or position, the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake. The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch. INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB You can change the instrument panel brightness only when the light switch is on. Turn the knob on the lower part of the instrument panel to adjust the brightness. You will hear a beep when maximum or minimum brightness is reached. CONTINUED 75 Instruments and Controls Turn Signal − Push down on the lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever, and hold it. The lever will return to center when you release it or complete a turn. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：４８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８１ Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button Hazard Warning Button HAZARD WARNING BUTTON To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to or . Turning the Select/Reset knob fully to the right until you hear a beep will cancel the reduced brightness. 76 Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１７：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８２ Rear Window Defogger Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive. Instruments and Controls The defogger wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side. If equipped Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on or off. For more information, see page 109 . The rear window defogger will clear fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch. You have to turn the defogger on again when you restart the vehicle. 77 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８３ Parking Brake, Steering Wheel Adjustment Parking Brake Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and axles. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL To apply the parking brake, push the pedal down with your foot. To release it, push on the pedal again. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page 60 ). 78 Steering Wheel Adjustments Make any steering wheel adjustment before you start driving. Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. 1. Push the lever under the steering column all the way down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：１２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８４ Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks Keys and Locks KEY NUMBER TAG MASTER KEY WITH REMOTE TRANSMITTER VALET KEY (Gray) 4. Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. Instruments and Controls These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged. LEVER 3. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in position. You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Honda-approved key blanks. The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle. The valet key works only in the ignition and the driver’s door lock. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility. Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth. The valet key does not contain a battery. Do not try to take it apart. 79 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：１９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８５ Immobilizer System The Immobilizer System protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again. The system may not recognize your key’s coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key fob) is near the ignition switch when you insert the key. 80 If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key, contact your dealer. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle undrivable. If you have lost your key and cannot start your engine, contact your dealer. As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８６ Ignition Switch LOCK (0) − You can insert or remove the key only in this position. To turn the key, the shift lever must be in Park, and you must push the key in slightly. You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position and open the driver’s door. Remove the key to turn off the beeper. ACCESSORY (I) − You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position. The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch. ON (II) − This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position. START (III) − Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the key. 81 Instruments and Controls The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III). If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：３４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８７ Door Locks All doors and the tailgate can be locked from the outside by using the key in the driver’s door lock. To unlock only the driver’s door, insert the key, turn the key, and release it. The remaining doors and the tailgate unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds. Power Door Locks Lock Lock Unlock MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all doors and the tailgate, push the front of the master door lock switch on either front door, pull the lock tab rearward on the driver sdoor, or use the key on the outside lock on the driver s door. Pushing the rear of the either master door lock switch will unlock all doors and the tailgate. Pushing forward the lock tab on the driver s doors unlocks only that door. 82 Unlock RED INDICATOR The lock tab on any passenger’s door locks and unlocks that door. When the door is unlocked, you can see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：３９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８８ Door Locks Lockout Prevention With any door and the tailgate open and the key in the ignition, locking with master door lock switches is disabled. The lock tab on the driver’s door is not disabled if the driver’s door is closed. Pulling the driver’s lock tab rearward will lock all doors and the tailgate. If you try to lock an open driver’s door by pulling the lock tab rearward, the lock tab on the driver’s door pops out and unlocks the driver’s door. Instruments and Controls To lock any passenger’s door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab rearward and close the door. To lock the driver’s door, remove the key from the ignition switch, pull the lock tab rearward or push the top of the master switch, then close the door. 83 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１８：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００８９ Door Locks Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle has customizable settings for the doors and the tailgate to automatically lock and unlock. Make all settings before you start driving. To activate an auto door lock mode: Locks all doors and tailgate when the shift lever is moved out of park (P). 4. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Auto Door Locking The auto door locking feature has three possible settings: The doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h). This is the factory setting. The auto door locking is deactivated all the time. The doors and the tailgate lock whenever you move the shift lever out of the Park position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and close the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 3. Set the parking brake. 84 3. Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound, and after about 5 seconds, you will hear another clicking sound. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１９：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９０ Door Locks To turn the auto door lock modes off: 4. Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound after about 5 seconds. To activate an auto door lock mode: Locks all doors and tailgate when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h). Instruments and Controls 5. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and open the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 3. Set the parking brake. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and close the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 3. Set the parking brake. CONTINUED 85 ０６／０８／１１ １９：０６：４６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９１ Door Locks 4. Push and hold the brake pedal, then move the shift lever out of Park (P). Auto Door Unlocking The auto door unlocking feature has five possible settings: 5. Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound, and after about 5 seconds, you will hear another clicking sound. The driver’s door unlocks when you move the shift lever to the Park position. This is the factory setting. 6. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. 7. Move the shift lever to the PARK (P) position, then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. To activate an auto door unlock mode: Unlocks driver’s door when the ignition switch is moved out of the ON (II) position. The driver’s door unlocks whenever you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. All doors and the tailgate unlock when you move the shift lever to the Park position. All doors and tailgate unlock whenever you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and close the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 3. Set the parking brake. 86 ０６／０８／１１ １９：０６：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９２ Door Locks 4. Push and hold the brake pedal, then move the shift lever out of Park (P). To turn the auto door unlock modes off: 5. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Until you hear one click (after about 5 seconds) to activate the driver’s door unlock feature. Or, until you hear a second click (after about 10 seconds) to activate the all doors and tailgate unlock feature. 6. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position. 7. Move the shift lever to the PARK (P) position, then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and open the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 3. Set the parking brake. CONTINUED 87 Instruments and Controls 5. Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound. Continue to hold down the switch: 4. Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound, and after about 5 seconds, you will hear another clicking sound. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１９：３４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９３ Door Locks To activate an auto door unlock mode: Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors and the tailgate when the shift lever is moved to Park (P). 3. Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a clicking sound. Continue to hold down the switch: Until you hear one click (after about 5 seconds) to activate the driver’s door unlock feature. Or, until you hear a second click (after about 10 seconds) to activate the all doors and tailgate unlock feature. 4. Release the switch and then, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park (P), and close the driver’s door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 88 Childproof Door Locks LEVER Unlock Lock The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１９：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９４ Remote Transmitter LED LOCK BUTTON PANIC BUTTON LOCK − Press this button once to lock all doors and the tailgate. Some exterior lights will flash once. When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors and the tailgate are locked and the security system (if equipped) has set. You cannot lock the doors and the tailgate if any door or the tailgate is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition switch. The ceiling light and the spot light (if equipped) comes on when you press the UNLOCK button if the lights are in the door activated position. If you do not open any door or the tailgate within 30 seconds, the light fades out. If you relock the doors and the tailgate with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed, the light(s) will go off immediately. PANIC − Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound, and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If you do not open any door or the tailgate within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock, and the security system (if equipped) will reset. CONTINUED 89 Instruments and Controls UNLOCK BUTTON UNLOCK − Press this button once to unlock the driver’s door. Push it twice to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. ０６／０７／０５ １２：１９：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９５ Remote Transmitter Remote Transmitter Care Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter. Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature. Replacing the Transmitter Battery If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate, replace the battery as soon as possible. Battery type: CR1616 Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid. If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer. SCREW To replace the battery: 1. Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small Phillips-head screwdriver. 90 ０６／０７／０５ １２：１９：５９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９６ Remote Transmitter 4. Remove the old battery, and insert a new battery into the back of the cover with the ＋ side facing down. TAB 2. Separate the transmitter by prying its middle seam with your fingernail. 3. Inside the transmitter, separate the inner cover from the keypad by releasing the two tabs on the cover. 5. Install the parts in reverse order. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 91 Instruments and Controls An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. BATTERY As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：０５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９７ Tailgate The tailgate will lock when you lock the driver’s door with the key, the remote transmitter, the master door lock switch, or the lock tab on the driver’s door. HANDLE RELEASE To unlock the tailgate, turn the key clockwise twice, push the rear of the master door lock switch, or push the UNLOCK twice on the remote transmitter. To open the tailgate, push the release, and lift up. To close the tailgate, use the tailgate handle to lower it, then press down on the back edge. 92 Keep the tailgate closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page 54 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：１２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９８ Tailgate Unlocking the Tailgate RELEASE LEVER Place a cloth on the upper of the cover, then use a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover on the back of the tailgate. Instruments and Controls If the power door lock system cannot unlock the tailgate, unlock it manually. Push the release lever to the lower right as shown. If you need to unlock the tailgate manually, it means there is a problem with the tailgate. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer. 93 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：２０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ００９９ Seats Seat Adjustments See pages 11 − 13 for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seatbacks. move the seat to make sure it is locked in position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving. REAR SEAT To change the seat-back angle of the front seat, pull up the lever on the outside of the seat bottom. FRONT SEAT To adjust the front or rear seat forward and backward, pull up on the bar under the seat cushion’s front edge. Move the seat to the desired position, and release the lever. Try to 94 Once your seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position. The angle of each rear seat-back can be adjusted separately. To change the seat-back angle of the rear seatback, pull up on the release lever on the top of the seat-back. Move the seat-back to the desired position, then release the lever. Make sure the seat-back latches in the new position. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１００ Seats When using the center seating position, adjust the left and right side of the rear seats to the same position. Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Armrests FRONT The height of your driver’s seat is adjustable. To raise the seat, repeatedly pull up the lever on the outside of the seat cushion. To lower the seat, push the lever down repeatedly. Each front seat has an armrest on the side of the seat-back. To use it, pivot it down. CONTINUED 95 Instruments and Controls Make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the rear seatbacks after you adjust the rear seats. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０１ Seats Rear Armrest/Cargo Passthrough If your vehicle is equipped with a dual deck cargo shelf, do not use the shelf when any seat-back is folded down. Objects placed on this shelf can be thrown forward and occupants can be injured during sudden stops or a collision. For more information of the dual deck cargo shelf, see page 111 . REAR The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it. 96 The rear center seat-back has an armrest. To use it, fold it down. To use the cargo area pass-through, pull up the release on top of the center seat-back and fold it down. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０２ Seats Head Restraints See page 13 for important safety information and a warning about how to properly position the head restraints. They are most effective when you adjust them so the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. FRONT POSITION RELEASE BUTTON The head restraints adjust for height. You need both hands to adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise it, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down. REAR OUTER POSITION RELEASE BUTTON To remove a head restraint, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back. Make sure the removed head restraints are securely stored. Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it. CONTINUED 97 Instruments and Controls Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０３ Seats Reclining the Front Seats SLIDE BAR REAR CENTER SEAT-BACK ANGLE ADJUSTMENT LEVER RELEASE BUTTON When a passenger is seated in the rear center seating position, make sure the center head restraint is properly adjusted. You can recline the seat-backs on the front seats so they are level with the rear seat cushions, making a large cushioned area. To do this: 1. Adjust the rear seats as far back as possible. 98 2. Remove the front head restraints (see page 97 ), and store them securely. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２０：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０４ Seats 4. Adjust the rear seat-back to the desired position. Reverse this procedure to return the front and rear seats to the upright position. Make sure you install the head restraints and securely lock the seats before driving. When you return the seat-back to its upright position, hold the seat-back to keep it from going up too quickly. Folding the Rear Seats Down Each rear seat-back can be folded down separately to give more cargo room. With either of the outer seatbacks folded-down, you can still carry a passenger in the rear seat. With the center seat-back foldeddown, either outer seating position can be used. You can also fold up the left or right side of the rear seats separately to create further cargo space (see page 102 ). BUCKLE 1. Push the seat belt buckles into the seat cushion. Remove any items from the seat before folding down the seat-back. CONTINUED 99 Instruments and Controls 3. Adjust the front seats forward as far as possible. Pull up the seatback angle adjustment lever and pivot the seat-back backward until it is level with the rear seat cushion. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０５ Seats Reverse this procedure to return the seat-back to the upright position. Make sure the seat is secured and the seat belt in front of the seat-back before driving. In the rear center seating position, be sure the detachable anchor is latched securely (see page 104 ). LATCH PLATE RELEASE LEVER When you are folding the rear center seat-back, use the latch plate to release the center seat belt from the detachable anchor (see page 104 ). Allow the seat belt to retract into the holder on the ceiling and store the buckles in it. 2. Lower the rear head restraints to its lowest position. Make sure the rear seat armrest is stored. Do not put any heavy items on the seat-back when it is folded down. 100 3. Pull up the release lever on the top of the seat-back. 4. Fold the seat-back forward. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０６ Seats When any seat-back is folded down, do not use the dual deck cargo shelf (if equipped). Folding the Rear Seat Forward Make sure all items in the cargo area are secured. Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo on page 222 ). SLIDE BAR The left and right rear seats can be folded up separately to make room for cargo. Remove any items from the seat before you fold up the seat cushion. To fold the rear seat forward: 1. Pull up the bar under the seat cushion and slide the rear seat backward. The rear seat will not fold forward unless it is not as far back as it will go. CONTINUED 101 Instruments and Controls Make sure that the folded down rear seat does not interfere with the front passenger’s seat-back. This will cause the front passenger’s weight sensors and the front passenger’s seat belt reminder indicator to work improperly (see pages 27 and 31 ). Also check the passenger airbag off indicator to assure proper operation of the passenger’s front airbag. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：２２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０７ Seats 2. Follow steps 1 through 4 on page 99 for folding down the seatback. ANCHOR Lower the center seat-back before folding the passenger’s side seat forward. HOOK LOCK RELEASE STRAP 3. Unlock the seat from the floor by pulling the lock release strap under the seat cushion’s back edge, then lift the rear of the seat. You cannot fold up the rear seat if it is not latched securely in the rearmost position. 102 FASTENING STRAP 4. Pull out the fastening strap from the slit on the seat-back. Then attach the anchor on the fastening strap to the hook on the center pillar. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０８ Seats FASTENING STRAP ANCHOR 5. Pull down on the anchor to engage the upper part of the anchor securely on the hook, and make sure the seat is secure. Reverse this procedure to return the seat to the upright position. Make sure the seat is securely latched before driving. When you are not using the fastening strap, store the strap into the slit on the seat-back. Make sure both outer seat belts are positioned in side of the rear seatbacks. In the center seating position of the rear seat, be sure the detachable anchor is latched securely before using the seat belt (see page 104 ). Make sure all items in the cargo area are secured. Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo on page 222 ). Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf (if equipped) when the seats are folded down or forward. 103 Instruments and Controls HOOK Make sure that the folded up right rear seat does not interfere with the front passenger’s seat-back. This will cause the front passenger’s weight sensors and the front passenger’s seat belt reminder indicator to work improperly (see page 32 ). Also check the passenger airbag off indicator to assure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１０９ Seats Detachable Anchor The seat belt in the rear center seat is equipped with a detachable anchor. SMALL LATCH PLATE This allows the center seat belt to be unlatched when the rear center seat back is folded down or the right side rear seat is folded forward. TRIANGLE MARKS Using a seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash. Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched. 104 LATCH PLATE Pull out the small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt to extend it. ANCHOR BUCKLE Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle when reattaching the belt and buckle. Tug on the seat belt to verify that the detachable anchor is securely latched. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：４７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１０ Seats, Seat Heaters ANCHOR BUCKLE keep the seat warm. Seat Heaters In HI, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seat’s temperature drops. LATCH PLATE To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. Store the detachable anchor and seat belt latch plates in the retractor housing. DRIVER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH PASSENGER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH If equipped Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. The passenger seat is only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag cut off system. The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters. Push the top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the bottom of the switch. This will Follow these precautions when using the seat heaters: Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery. If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting. 105 Instruments and Controls In LO, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２１：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１１ Power Windows DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them. MAIN SWITCH Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to raise or lower any window. To open the window, push the switch down and hold it. Release the switch when you want to stop the window. To close the window, pull back on the switch and hold it. The windows will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. Opening either front door cancels this function. 106 AUTO − To open or close the driver’s window, push or pull the window switch firmly down or up to the second detent, and release it. The window will automatically go up or down all the way. To stop the window, pull or push the window switch briefly. When you push the MAIN switch in, the switch is off, and the passenger windows cannot be raised or lowered. To cancel this feature, push on the switch again to get it to pop out. Keep the MAIN switch off when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally. AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again. Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：０３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１２ Moonroof MOONROOF SWITCH OPEN To open the moonroof, pull back on the switch and hold it. Release the switch when the moonroof reaches the desired position. To close the moonroof, push the switch forward and hold it. Release the switch to stop the operation. AUTO − To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly, then release it. The moonroof automatically opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening, push the switch briefly. To close the moonroof fully, firmly push the moonroof switch forward, then release it. The moonroof automatically closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing, push the switch briefly. If equipped The moonroof can be tilted up in the back for ventilation, or it can be slid back into the roof. Use the switch on the front ceiling to operate the moonroof. You must turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to operate the moonroof. Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. To open or close the moonroof partially, lightly pull the switch back or push it forward and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it. CONTINUED 107 Instruments and Controls TILT CLOSE To tilt up the moonroof, push on the center of the moonroof switch. To stop the moonroof from tilting up fully, push the switch briefly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１３ Moonroof, Mirrors AUTO REVERSE − If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it. The moonroof has a key-off delay. You can open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. The key-off delay cancels as soon as you open either front door. You must then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for the moonroof to operate. If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor. Mirrors TAB Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving. The inside mirror has day and night positions. The night position reduces glare from headlights behind you. Flip the tab on the bottom edge of the mirror to select the day or night position. 108 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１４ Mirrors Adjusting the Power Mirrors SELECTOR SWITCH 3. Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down. Power Mirror Heaters ADJUSTMENT SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Move the selector switch to L (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s side). Instruments and Controls 4. When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON If equipped The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off. 109 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１５ Interior Convenience Items ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET COAT HOOK DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDER SUNGLASSES HOLDER CONVERSATION MIRROR SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR UPPER GLOVE BOX DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF＊1 BEVERAGE HOLDERS in REAR SEAT ARMREST CENTER CONSOLE with BEVERAGE HOLDERS＊2 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK＊3 SEAT UNDER TRAY＊1 ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET＊2 ＊1 If equipped ＊2 On some models, this is on the center table ＊3 This is on the center table or on the front panel, depending on models 110 LOWER GLOVE BOX CENTER POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：３２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１６ Interior Convenience Items Dual Deck Cargo Shelf Make sure to use the dual deck cargo shelf fully opened and securely latched. To remove the dual deck cargo shelf, fold up the rear half of the shelf forward onto the front half, push up on both sides, then pull it toward you. To store the dual deck cargo shelf, lift up either side of it, then move it as shown above. Place the dual deck cargo shelf on the far side of the cargo floor, then slide it forward while folding out the upper half of the shelf. CONTINUED 111 Instruments and Controls If equipped The dual deck cargo shelf will separate the storage area into two storage areas. On the upper area, you can store small and light items. You should place heavy items in the lower storage area. You can remove the dual deck cargo shelf and store it on the cargo floor to make a larger cargo area. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：３９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１７ Interior Convenience Items Do not use this shelf if the second row seats are folded down. Objects placed on the shelf could be thrown forward during a crash or sudden stop and hurt someone. The dual deck cargo shelf can be placed on the floor as shown above. Reverse this procedure to return the dual deck cargo shelf to the upper position. Make sure the dual deck cargo shelf is latched securely. 112 When any of the rear seats is folded down or forward, do not place any objects on the dual deck cargo shelf. Make sure to store the shelf on the cargo area floor. It could be unlatched during a crash. The maximum load on the dual deck cargo shelf is 20 lbs on U.S. models, and 10kg on canadian models. This is shown on a label on the driver’s side of the dual deck cargo shelf (see page 56 ). To prevent damage to the dual deck cargo shelf, do not exceed the maximum load. Make sure all items in the cargo area are secured. Loose items can fly forward and cause injury if you have to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo on page 222 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：４６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１８ Interior Convenience Items Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. On vehicles with rear seat armrest On U.S. models To prevent damage, do not place more than 20 lbs (9 kg) on this shelf. The rear seat also has a beverage holder in the center armrest. To use it, pivot the armrest down. On Canadian models To prevent damage, do not place more than 10 kg on this shelf. 113 Instruments and Controls Beverage Holders Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Liquid can also spill from the door pocket beverage holders when you open or close the doors. Use only resealable containers in the door pockets. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２２：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１１９ Interior Convenience Items Center Table Lower Glove Box To lock On LX and EX models To use the center table, pull up the outside edge of the table until it latches. To store it, pull the lever and lower the table. 114 Sitting on or getting under the table, or putting heavy objects on the table, may damage or deform it. Do not put any items on the table while driving. They may fall down or fly around when you go around corners or brake hard. Open the lower glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key. The glove box light comes on when the parking lights are on. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２０ Interior Convenience Items Upper Glove Box EDGE Always keep the glove box closed while driving. LEVER Open the upper glove box by pushing up the lever. Close it by pulling down on the edge under the lever. To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover. 115 Instruments and Controls An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Vanity Mirror ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２１ Interior Convenience Items Sun Visor Sunglasses Holder Push SUN VISOR To use the sun visor, pull it down. When using the sun visor for the side window, remove the support rod from the clip, and swing it out. Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle. 116 SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push on the raised detent. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving. Some larger styles of sunglasses may not fit in the holder. You may also store small items in this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２２ Interior Convenience Items Conversation Mirror Accessory Power Sockets FRONT The sunglasses holder uses a convex mirror for its bottom panel. You can see all the vehicle passengers in this mirror. To use the mirror, open the sunglasses holder fully, push it to the first detent, and release it. To switch back to the sunglasses holder, close the conversation mirror and then open the sunglasses holder. Your vehicle has two or three accessory power sockets depending on the model. To use an accessory power socket, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Each socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps). CONTINUED 117 Instruments and Controls EX model ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：２５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２３ Interior Convenience Items Console Compartment REAR Push EX-L model None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element. 118 Make sure to put the socket cover back in place to prevent any small foreign objects getting into the socket. If equipped Push the release knob to open or close the console compartment, slide the lid rearward. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２４ Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights Coat Hook Seat Under Tray Ceiling Light OFF DOOR ACTIVATED To use a coat hook, slide it out slightly, then pull it down. Make sure the coat hook is folded up when you are not using it. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items. If equipped Your vehicle has a seat under tray located under the front passenger seat. Use the tray by pulling on the front center edge of the tray. The ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated, and OFF. In the Door Activated (center) position, the light comes on when you: Open any door. Unlock the doors and the tailgate with the key or remote transmitter. 119 Instruments and Controls ON ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２５ Interior Lights After all doors and the tailgate are closed tightly, the light fades out in about 30 seconds. The ceiling light (with the switch in the center position) comes on when you remove the key from the ignition switch. If you do not open a door and the tailgate, the light fades out in about 30 seconds. If you leave any door or the tailgate open without the key in the ignition switch, the ceiling light goes off after 3 minutes. Spotlights The spotlights have a two-position switch. In the DOOR position, the lights come on when you open any door. In the OFF position, the lights do not come on. Courtesy light Push Push LX model Push Push EX, EX-L models The spotlights (with the switch in the DOOR position) also come on when you unlock the door with the key or the remote transmitter, and when you remove the key from the ignition switch. 120 Courtesy light Turn on the spotlight by pushing the lens. Push the lens again to turn it off. You can use the spotlights at all times. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２６ Interior Lights Ignition Switch Light The ignition switch light comes on when you open the driver’s door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed. Cargo Area Light ON Instruments and Controls Courtesy Light The courtesy light between the spotlights comes on when you turn the parking lights on. To adjust its brightness, turn the Select/Reset knob on the instrument panel. OFF TAILGATE ACTIVATED The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position, the light does not come on. In the center position, it comes on when you open the tailgate. In the ON position, it stays on continuously. 121 ０６／０７／０５ 122 １２：２３：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２７ ０６／０７／０５ １２：２３：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２８ Features The heating and air conditioning system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions. Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it. The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your vehicle. LX model Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 131 Playing a Disc ..................................135 Disc Player Error Messages .........142 EX and EX-L models without navigation system Playing the AM/FM Radio ............143 Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 147 Playing Discs ...................................152 Disc Player Error Messages .........159 EX-L Models with navigation system Playing the AM/FM Radio ............160 Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 166 Playing a disc ...................................172 CD Changer.....................................181 Playing a PC card ............................188 AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 200 Protecting Your Discs ................... 202 Remote Audio Controls................. 203 Radio Theft Protection.................. 205 Setting the Clock ........................... 206 Security System ............................. 207 Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 208 Cruise Control ................................ 209 123 Features The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those features and how to use them. Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 124 Audio System ................................. 129 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２４：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１２９ Vents, Heating, and A/C MODE CONTROL BUTTONS FAN CONTROL DIAL MAX A/C BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON ＊ : EX-L model and All Canadian models 124 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON＊ REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ０６／０７／０５ １２：２４：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３０ Vents, Heating, and A/C Fan Control Dial Turn this dial to increase or decrease the fan speed and airflow. Temperature Control Dial Turning this dial clockwise increases the temperature of the airflow. MAX A/C Button The system automatically turns on the A/C and switches to recirculation mode. Air flows from the center and side vents in the dashboard. Pressing the , A/C, or any of mode buttons cancels MAX A/C. Rear Window Defogger Button This button turns the rear window defogger off and on (see page 77 ). The outside air intakes for the heating and cooling system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris. Mode Control Use the mode control buttons to select the vents air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard corner vents in all modes. The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up. Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode. On some models, this button also operates the heated outside mirrors (see page 109 ). Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard. Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents. CONTINUED 125 Features Air Conditioning (A/C) Button This button turns the air conditioning on and off. The indicator in the button is on when the A/C is on. Recirculation Button When the recirculation indicator is on, air from the vehicle’s interior is sent throughout the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode). ０６／０７／０５ １２：２４：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３１ Vents, Heating, and A/C Air flows from the floor vents. When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode. If you switch the mode from or to , the system keeps the A/C on. The A/C indicator will not come on if it was off to start with. To turn off the A/C, press the A/C button to illuminate the indicator, then press it again to turn off the A/C. When you switch to or mode from , the A/C turns off. But if it was on to start with, the A/C stays on. Airflow is divided between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield. 126 Air flows from the defroster vents at the base of the windshield. When you select or , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. You cannot turn the A/C off in this mode. Ventilation The flow-through ventilation system draws in outside air, circulates it through the interior, then discharges it through vents near the tailgate. 1. Set the temperature to the lower limit. 2. Make sure the A/C is off. and fresh air mode. 3. Select 4. Set the fan to the desired speed. Using the Heater The heater uses engine coolant to warm the air. If the engine is cold, it will be several minutes before you feel warm air coming from the system. . 1. Select When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode. If you switch the mode from or , the system also automatically turns on the A/C. This helps prevent the windows from fogging up unintendedly. The A/C indicator will not come on if it was off to start with (see the first column on this page). 2. Set the fan to the desired speed. 3. Adjust the warmth of the air with the temperature control dial. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２４：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３２ Vents, Heating, and A/C Using the A/C Air conditioning places an extra load on the engine. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge (see page 69 ). If it moves near the red zone, turn off the A/C until the gauge reading returns to normal. To cool the interior with MAX A/C: 1. Set the fan to the desired speed. 2. Select MAX A/C. The system automatically turns on the A/C, selects , and switches to recirculation mode. 3. Make sure the temperature is set to maximum cool. Dehumidify the Interior Air conditioning, as it cools, removes moisture from the air. When used in combination with the heater, it makes the interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up. 1. Turn the fan on. 2. Turn on the air conditioning. and fresh air mode. 3. Select 4. Adjust the temperature to your preference. This setting is suitable for all driving conditions whenever the outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 127 Features 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on when a fan speed is selected. 2. Make sure the temperature is set to maximum cool. . 3. Select 4. If the outside air is humid, select recirculation mode. If the outside air is dry, select fresh air mode. 5. Set the fan to the desired speed. If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning on the air conditioning, and setting the fan to maximum speed in fresh air mode. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２４：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３３ Vents, Heating, and A/C To Defog and Defrost To remove fog from the inside of the windows: 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or high for faster defrosting. . The system 2. Select automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. The A/C indicator will not come on if it was off to start with. 3. Adjust the temperature so the airflow feels warm. / to help 4. Select clear the rear window. 5. To increase airflow to the windshield, close the corner vents. When you switch to , from or , the A/C stays on. This helps prevent the windows from rapidly fogging up when the air is suddenly routed away from the windshield. If you want to turn the A/C off, press and release the A/C button twice. The indicator in the button comes on and then goes off. 128 To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice From the Windows . The system 1. Select automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. The A/C indicator does not come on if it was off to start with. . 2. Select 3. Set the fan and temperature controls to maximum level. To clear the windows faster, you can close the dashboard corner vents by rotating the wheel below each vent. This sends more warm air to the windshield defroster vents. Once the windshield is clear, select fresh air mode to avoid fogging the windows. For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. To Turn Everything Off Turning the fan speed control dial all the way to the left shuts the system off. Keep the system off for short periods only. To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３４ Audio System An audio system is standard on all models. Read the appropriate pages (as shown below) to use your vehicle’s audio system. LX model U.S. EX and Canadian EX, EX-L models without navigation system For LX, models, see pages 131 through 142 . Features For EX and EX-L models without navigation system, see pages 143 through 159 . For EX-L model with navigation system, see pages 160 through 199 . U.S. EX-L model without navigation system CONTINUED 129 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：１２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３５ Audio System U.S. EX-L model with navigation system 130 Canadian EX-L model with navigation system ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：１７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３６ Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model) U.S. and Canadian LX models AM FM BUTTON BUTTON Features POWER/ VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB A.SEL/SCAN BAR SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BUTTONS 131 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３７ Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model) To Play the AM/FM Radio The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the power/volume knob or the AM or FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob. The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to is displayed. To change bands, press the AM or FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available. 132 To Select a Station You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, seek, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Turn the knob to the right to tune a higher frequency, and turn it to the left to tune a lower frequency. SEEK/SKIP − The seek function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press the or side of the SEEK bar, then release it. SCAN − The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the right side of the A. SEL/SCAN bar, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the bar again. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３８ Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model) Preset − Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM. 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune the radio to a desired station. 3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and hold it until you hear a beep. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM. Press the left side of the A. SEL/SCAN bar. You will see A. SEL flashing in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM, and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described. To turn off auto select, press the A. SEL side of the bar. This restores the presets you originally set. For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page 200 . You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button. 133 Features 1. Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button. AUTO SELECT − If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１３９ Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model) Adjusting the Sound Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob repeatedly to display the BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation) settings. BASS − Adjusts the bass. SVC − Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting to your liking. Except SVC adjustment When the level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound. The system will return to the audio display about 5 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode. BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound. Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC) The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases. The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to 134 adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high. This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory. Audio System Lighting You can use the instrument panel brightness control knob to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page 75 ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：４９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４０ Playing a Disc (LX model) U.S. and Canadian LX model CD/AUX BUTTON EJECT BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON Features LOAD INDICATOR POWER/ VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB A.SEL/SCAN BAR SEEK/SKIP BAR 135 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２５：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４１ Playing a Disc (LX model) To Play a Disc To load or play disc, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc player, press the CD/ AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit. This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA formats. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the display. You can select up to 99 folders, or up to 255 tracks/files. NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays FORMAT, and then skips to the next file. Video CDs and DVD discs do not work in this unit. 136 The specifications of the compatible MP3 file are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) −Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４２ Playing a Disc (LX model) To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way to play it. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. The number of the current track is shown in the display. When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers of the current folder and file are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes. Each time you press the DISP button, the display shows you the text data on a disc, if the disc was recorded with text data. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system. You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the album, artist, and track tag. With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display. The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name. CONTINUED 137 Features The specifications of the compatible WMA file are: −Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：１６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４３ Playing a Disc (LX model) The display shows up to about 10 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.). If the text data has more than 10 characters, you will see the first 9 characters and the ＞ indicator in the display. Press and hold the DISP button until the next 10 characters are shown. You will also see some text data under these conditions: When a new folder, file, or track is selected. When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in MP3 or WMA. When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play. 138 When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name. To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3/WMA mode). SEEK/SKIP − Each time you press and release the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side, to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold the or side of the SEEK/SKIP bar. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４４ Playing a Disc (LX model) In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed. To activate folder repeat, press the RPT button twice. You will hear a beep and see F-RPT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, or selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob also turns off the repeat feature. REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT) − To continuously replay a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), press and release the RPT button. You will see RPT in the display. Press and hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it off. RANDOM (Random within a disc) − This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, press and release the RDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press the RDM button repeatedly to select RDM (within a disc random play). You will see RDM in the display. Press the RDM button for 2 seconds to return to normal play. Each time you press and release the RPT button, the mode changes from file repeat to folder repeat, then to normal playing. CONTINUED 139 Features In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER SELECTION − To select a different folder, turn the TUNE knob to move to the beginning of the next folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip to the next folder, and to the left to move to the beginning of the current folder. Turn it again to skip to the beginning of the previous folder. Turning the TUNE knob more than one click skips several folders at a time. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：３１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４５ Playing a Disc (LX model) In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER-RANDOM − This feature, when activated, plays all files on the selected folder in random order. To activate folder random, press the RDM button 2 times. You will hear a beep and see F-RDM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random by pressing and holding the RDM button again, or by selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob. Each time you press and release the RDM button, the mode changes from folder random play to random play (within a disc random play), then to normal playing. SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − The scan function samples all tracks (files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc. To activate scan, press and release the SCAN bar. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/ file on the disc. Press and hold the SCAN button for about 2 seconds to get out of scan mode and play the last track/file sampled. Pressing either side of the SEEK/ SKIP bar also turns off the scan feature. In MP3 or WMA mode F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder on the disc. To activate folder scan, press the SCAN bar twice. You will see F-SCAN in the display. The system plays the first file in the first folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the first files in the remaining folders for 10 seconds each. After playing the first file of the last folder, the system plays normally. Pressing either side of the SEEK/ SKIP bar, selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob, or pressing the SCAN bar, also turns off the folder scan. Each time you press and release the SCAN bar, the mode changes from scan to folder scan, then to normal playing. 140 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：３８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４６ Playing a Disc (LX model) You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off. If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off. Features To Stop Playing a Disc Press the eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload the disc after 10 seconds and put it in pause mode. To begin playing, press the CD/AUX button. Protecting Discs For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page 202 . To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM or FM button. Press the CD/AUX button again to switch back to the disc player. 141 ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４７ Disc Player Error Messages (LX model) If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer. The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc. If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer. 142 Error Message Cause UNSUPPORT FORMAT BAD DISC CHECK MANUAL PUSH EJECT Track/File format not supported BAD DISC − CHECK MANUAL Servo Error Mechanical Error Solution Current track will skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt. Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player. The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２６：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４８ Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) U.S. EX-L U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models AM BUTTON FM SCAN BUTTON BUTTON AM FM BUTTON BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON Features SEEK BAR POWER/VOLUME KNOB PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BAR TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME KNOB PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB 143 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２７：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１４９ Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) To Play the AM/FM Radio The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the power/volume knob or the AM or FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob. The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to is displayed. To change bands, press the AM or FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available. 144 To Select a Station You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, seek, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Turn the knob to the right to tune a higher frequency, and turn it to the left to tune a lower frequency. SEEK − The seek function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press the or side of the SEEK bar, then release it. SCAN − The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again. ０６／０７／０５ １７：１８：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５０ Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Preset − Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM. 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune the radio to a desired station. 3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and hold it until you hear a beep. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM. Press the A. SEL button. You will see A. SEL flashing in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM, and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described. To turn off auto select, press the A. SEL button. This restores the presets you originally set. For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page 200 . You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button. 145 Features 1. Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button. AUTO SELECT − If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２７：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５１ Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Adjusting the Sound Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob repeatedly to display the BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SUBWOOFER (if equipped), and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation) settings. SVC − Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high. Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting to your liking. When the level reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory. BASS − Adjusts the bass. TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound. BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound. If equipped SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker. 146 The system will return to the audio display about 5 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode. Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC) The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases. The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, Audio System Lighting You can use the instrument panel brightness control knob to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page 75 ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off. ０６／０７／０５ １４：５７：３８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５２ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model) Playing the XM Satellite Radio On U.S. EX-L Your audio system is capable of receiving XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the United States, except Hawaii and Alaska. POWER/VOLUME KNOB DISPLAY MODE BUTTON SCAN BUTTON XM RADIO BUTTON Features XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc. XM radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display. PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB 147 ０６／０７／０５ １４：５７：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５３ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model) Operating the XM Radio To listen to XM radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button. Adjust the volume by turning the knob. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. MODE − To switch between channel mode and category mode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the mode changes. In channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category. Each time you press and release the DISP/MODE button, the display changes in the following sequence: Channel name, channel number, category, artist name, and music title. You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artist’s name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system. TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to change channel selections. Turn the knob right for higher numbered channels and left for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category. SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) − Press either side of the CATEGORY bar ( or ) to select another category. 148 ０６／０７／０５ １４：５７：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５４ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model) Preset − You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band. 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune to a desired channel. In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected. 3. Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels. 5. Press the XM button again. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3. To store a channel: 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in the display. XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the audio or program information. ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting. ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally. ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon. Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it. CONTINUED 149 Features SCAN − The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the button again. ０６／０７／０５ １４：５８：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５５ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model) ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel number does not exist or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time. Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south. Signal weaker in these areas. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer. SATELLITE GROUND REPEATER The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. 150 Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal. ０６／０７／０５ １４：５８：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５６ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model) Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions: There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM radio reception. Receiving Satellite Radio Service If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system and press the XM RADIO button. A variety of music types and styles will play. If you decide to purchase XM satellite radio service, contact XM Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press TUNE until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display. After you’ve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the satellite radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes. While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, you’ll be able to listen to XM radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. 151 Features Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road. Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels. Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. Large items carried on a roof rack. As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：１２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５７ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Playing a Disc U.S. EX-L model U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR DISC SLOT EJECT BUTTON LOAD BUTTON DISC SLOT REPEAT BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON DISPLAY BUTTON EJECT BUTTON LOAD BUTTON SEEK/SKIP BAR SCAN BUTTON POWER/VOLUME KNOB 152 LOAD INDICATOR CD/AUX BUTTON DISPLAY BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON SCAN SEEK/SKIP BAR BUTTON TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５８ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit. This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA formats. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the display. You can select up to 99 folders, or up to 255 tracks/files. NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays FORMAT, and then skips to the next file. Video CDs and DVD discs do not work in this unit. The specifications of the compatible MP3 file are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) −Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers The specifications of the compatible WMA file are: −Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers CONTINUED 153 Features To Play a Disc To load or play discs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You operate the disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc changer, press the CD button (CD/AUX button on models with satellite radio), the disc and track numbers are displayed. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１５９ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) 1. Press the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display. 3. Insert the disc into the disc slot when the green disc load indicator comes on. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the disc load indicator turns red and blinks as the disc is loaded. To load only one CD, press and release the LOAD button. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system. 2. The disc number for an empty position is highlighted and the red disc load indicator starts blinking. 4. When the disc load indicator turns green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the display again, insert the next disc in the slot. Do not try to insert a disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage the audio unit. Loading Discs in the In-dash Disc Changer Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer holds up to six discs. 5. Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, the system begins playing the last disc loaded. 154 You can also load a disc into an empty position while a disc is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. The system stops playing the current disc and starts the loading sequence. It plays the disc just loaded. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６０ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Text Data Display Function With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display. The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name. The display shows up to about 16 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.). If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 15 characters and the ＞ indicator in the display. Press and hold the DISP button until the next 16 characters are shown. When a new folder, file, or track is selected. When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in MP3 or WMA. When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play. When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name. To select a different disc, press the appropriate preset button (1 − 6). If you select an empty position in the disc changer, the system will try to load the disc in the next available slot. NOTE: With the optional CD changer, use the preset buttons (5 or 6) to select a different disc. Press and release the preset 5 (DISC−) button to select the previous disc or preset 6 (DISC−) to select the next disc in sequence. To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3/WMA mode). SEEK/SKIP − Each time you press and release the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side, to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold the or side of the SEEK/SKIP bar. 155 Features You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the artist, album, and track tag. You will also see some text data under these conditions: − Each time you press the DISP button, the display shows you the text data on a disc, if the disc was recorded with text data. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：５１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６１ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER SELECTION − To select a different folder, turn the TUNE knob to move to the beginning of the next folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip to the next folder, and to the left to move to the beginning of the current folder. Turn it again to skip to the beginning of the previous folder. Turning the TUNE knob more than one click skips several folders at a time. REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT) − To continuously replay a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), press and release the RPT button. You will see RPT in the display. Press and hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it off. You will hear a beep. are compressed. To activate folder repeat, press and release the RPT button repeatedly until you see FRPT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Press and hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob also turns off the repeat feature. a disc in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, press and release the RDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press the RDM button repeatedly to select RDM (within a disc random play). You will see RDM in the display. Press the RDM button for 2 seconds to return to normal play. DISC-REPEAT − To continuously replay the current disc, press and release the RPT button repeatedly until you see D-RPT in the display. Press and hold the RPT button for 2 seconds again to turn it off. FOLDER-RANDOM − This feature, when activated, plays all files on the selected folder in random order. To activate folder random, press and release the RDM button see F-RDM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random by pressing and hold the RDM button for 2 seconds, or by selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob. In MP3 or WMA mode Each time you press and release the RPT button, the mode changes from file repeat to folder repeat, to disc repeat then to normal playing. In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they 156 RANDOM (Random within a disc) − This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files within ０６／０７／０５ １２：２８：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６２ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) Each time you press and release the RDM button, the mode changes from folder random play to random play (within a disc random play), then to normal playing. Pressing either side of the SEEK/ SKIP bar also turns off the scan feature. The system plays the first file in the first folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the first files in the remaining folders for 10 seconds each. After playing the first file of the last folder, the system plays normally. DISC-SCAN − This function samples each first track of all the discs in the in-dash disc changer in the order they are stored. To activate disc scan, press the SCAN button repeatedly until you will see D-SCAN in the display. The system will then play the first track/file of the first disc for approximately 10 seconds. After playing the first track /file of the last disc, the system plays normally. Pressing either side of the SEEK/ SKIP bar, or selecting a different folder with the TUNE knob also turns off the scan feature. Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from scan to folder scan, disc scan then to normal playing. 157 Features SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − The scan function samples all tracks (files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press the SCAN button repeatedly to select SCAN. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/ file on the disc. Press and hold the SCAN button again to get out of scan mode and play the last track/file sampled. In MP3 or WMA mode F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder on the disc. To activate folder scan, press the SCAN button twice. You will see F-SCAN in the display. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：０５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６３ Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) To Stop Playing a Disc Press the AM, FM, AUX button, or CD/AUX, XM button to switch to the radio or satellite radio (U.S. models), while a disc is playing. Press the CD button again to play the disc. If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the PWR/ VOL knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off. Removing Discs from the In-dash Disc Changer To remove the disc currently in play, press the eject ( ) button. When a disc is removed from a slot, the system automatically begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position. If you do not remove the disc from the changer within 10 seconds, the system returns to the previous mode (AM, FM or satellite radio＊). The disc will reload into the system and will remain there in a pause mode. To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it with the appropriate preset button. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button. Continue pressing the eject button to remove all the discs from the changer. ＊ : On U.S. EX-L model 158 You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first. ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６４ Disc Player Error Messages (EX and EX-L models without navigation system) If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer. If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. UNSUPPORTED FORMAT BAD DISC − PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL PUSH EJECT BAD DISC − PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL Cause Track/File format not supported Mechanical Error Servo Error Solution Current track will skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s). Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt. Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player. The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically. The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer. 159 Features The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc. Error Message ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：２０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６５ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) Canadian EX-L model U.S. EX-L model AUTO SELECT ICON FM1 ICON AM ICON FM2 ICON SOUND ICON FM1 ICON BACK GROUND ICON AM/FM BUTTON AM ICON FM2 ICON SOUND ICON BACK GROUND ICON AM/FM BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON TUNE BAR 160 AUTO SELECT ICON PRESET BUTTON TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTON ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６６ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) To Play the AM/FM Radio The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the power/volume knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob. the bottom of the screen each time you operate any of the control buttons. On the navigation screen, you can also see audio information by touching the AUDIO INFO icon on the lower of the screen. The band and frequency that the radio was last turned to are displayed. To change bands, press the AM/FM button, or touch the desired band icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1＊, or XM 2＊). On the FM band, STEREO will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available. ＊ : On U.S. EX-L model Pushing the AUDIO button will also turn on the system. You can also operate the audio system without using the control icons on the audio screen. Use the control buttons on the left side of the screen. The status bar appears on To Select a Station You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, seek, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the ▲ side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, and press the ▼ side to tune to a lower frequency. Press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of the TUNE bar until you hear two beeps to change the frequency rapidly. Release the bar when the display reaches the desired frequency. For information on XM radio, see page 166 . CONTINUED 161 Features Voice Control System In addition to the standard audio controls, the audio system in your vehicle can be operated using the voice control system. See the navigation section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６７ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) SEEK − The seek function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of the TUNE bar until you hear a beep, then release it. SCAN − The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again. Preset − Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM. 1. Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button. 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune the radio to a desired station. 3. Pick a preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM. 162 Each preset button’s frequency is shown on the bottom of the audio display. ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６８ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) AUTO SELECT − If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described. Features Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control icons, then press the AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO SEL flashing in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM, and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button. To turn off auto select, press the AUTO SEL icon. This restores the presets you originally set. For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page 200 . 163 ０６／０７／０５ １２：２９：５５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１６９ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) Adjusting the Sound SPEAKER SETTING BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound. To adjust the left/right balance, touch the L or R icon. SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker. To adjust the sound strength, touch or on each side of the adjustment bar. BASS/TREBLE SETTING SOUND ICON You can adjust the sound on the navigation screen. To adjust the sound, push the AUDIO button, then enter the sound grid by touching the SOUND icon on the display. 164 BASS − Adjusts the bass. The right upper display shows you the current setting of the sound strength coming from each speaker. TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. To adjust the treble and bass, touch or on each side of the treble or bass adjustment bar. The adjustment bar on the right lower display shows you the current setting. FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound. To adjust the front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR icon. SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation) − The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases. Touch the appropriate icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the mode. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７０ Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. Audio System Lighting You can use the instrument panel brightness control knob to adjust the illumination of the control panel (see page 75 ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off. Features You can also select the icon with the joystick. Move it up and down to move the highlighting and scroll through lists. Select the icon, then move the joystick to left or right to change the setting. Screen Mode You can select the background screen to display the sound level. There are three screen modes: level (the sound level is shown with the vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the sound level appears as ripples of water), and off. Each time you touch the background icon, the display changes. The system will return to the audio display about 5 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode. 165 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７１ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) U.S. EX-L model XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON POWER/VOLUME KNOB JOYSTICK CATEGORY INDICATOR AM/FM BUTTON XM RADIO BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON PRESET CHANNEL NUMBER TUNE BAR 166 PRESET BUTTONS ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７２ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) Your audio system is capable of receiving XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the United States, except Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc. You can also change to the XM radio while you are listening to an FM station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc., by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on the audio display. MODE − To switch between channel mode and category mode, touch the MODE icon. In channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category. Each time you touch and release the MODE icon, the display changes between the channel mode and the category mode. You can also operate the radio using the control buttons on the left side of the screen. The status bar appears on the bottom of the screen each time you press any of the control buttons. On the navigation screen, you can also see the audio information by touching the AUDIO INFO icon on the lower of the screen. CONTINUED 167 Features XM radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display. When you press and hold the AUDIO button, the display also shows all XM information. Operating the XM Radio To listen to XM radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the CD/XM button. Adjust the volume by turning the knob. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７３ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press ▲ for higher numbered channels and ▼ for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category. Preset − You can store up to 12 preset channels using each preset button or preset icons on the screen. Each preset button or icon stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band. To store a channel: CATEGORY − Press and hold either side of the TUNE bar ( or ) until you hear a beep to select another category. On the audio display, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number), CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title). You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artist’s name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system. 168 SCAN − The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to listen to, press the button again. 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in the display. 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune to a desired channel. In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected. 3. Pick the preset button (icon) you want for that channel. Press and hold the button (icon) until you hear a beep. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：３２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７４ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels. Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button (icon) to tune to it. Each preset button’s channel is shown on the bottom of the audio display. ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the audio or program information. ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting. ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally. ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon. ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel number does not exist or is not part of your subscription. ‘‘NO INFO’’ − This channel has no artist or title information at this time. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer. CONTINUED 169 Features 5. Press the XM button again or touch the other XM icon (XM1 or XM2) on the audio display. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3. XM Radio Display Messages ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７５ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south. Signal weaker in these areas. The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal. SATELLITE GROUND REPEATER 170 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：４７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７６ Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system) Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions: There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM radio reception. Receiving Satellite Radio Service If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system and press the XM RADIO button. A variety of music types and styles will play. If you decide to purchase XM Satellite Radio service, contact XM Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display. After you’ve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the satellite radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes. While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, you’ll be able to listen to XM radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio. 171 Features Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road. Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels. Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. Large items carried on a roof rack. As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３０：５３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７７ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) CD ICON POWER/VOLUME KNOB JOYSTICK OPEN BUTTON CD BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON TUNE BAR RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON 172 FAST FORWARD BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP＋BUTTON SKIP−BUTTON U.S. EX-L model is shown ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７８ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) To Play a Disc (In-dash single player) You operate the in-dash disc player with the same controls used for the radio. To load or play discs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit. This audio system can also play CDRs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA formats. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear on the screen. You can select up to 255 folders and play up Video CDs and DVD discs do not work in this unit. The specifications for compatible MP3 files are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) −Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers The specifications for compatible WMA files are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz −Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays CD FORMAT, and then skips to the next file. CONTINUED 173 Features Your vehicle also has the CD changer and operate at with the same in-dash disc player. (see page 181 ) to 999 tracks. If the disc has a complex structure, it takes a while to read the disc before the system begins to play it. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１７９ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) To Load a Disc DISC SLOT OPEN BUTTON The in-dash disc player is behind the navigation screen. To use the disc player, press the OPEN button beside the screen. The screen folds back, and the disc slot appears. CLOSE BUTTON Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way and begin to play it. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system. 174 To return the screen to the upright position, press the CLOSE button on the edge of the screen panel. Do not use the folded screen as a tray. If you put a cup, for example, on the screen, the liquid inside the cup may spill on the screen when you go over a bump. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８０ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) Push the AUDIO button beside the screen to show the audio display and operate the disc player. When playing a CD recorded with text data, the track, album, and artist name are shown on the audio display. When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, the folder number and name, the file number and name, the artist name, and the elapsed time are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes. If the disc was not recorded with text data, it will not be displayed. PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION PRESET BUTTONS U.S. EX-L is shown You can use the preset buttons while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA mode). Each preset button’s function is shown on the bottom of the screen. You can also select an icon with the joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or down to change the highlighting and scroll through lists. Then press the ENT on the top of the joystick to select the icon. SKIP − Each time you press and release (preset 6), the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release (preset 5), to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track. FF/REW − To move rapidly within a track/file, press and hold (preset 4) or (preset 3). CONTINUED 175 Features You can also operate the audio system without using the control icons on the audio screen. Press the CD button. The status bar appears on the bottom of the screen. On the navigation screen, you can see the audio information whenever you touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the lower of the screen. To Change or Select Tracks/Files ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８１ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER SELECTION − To select a different folder, press either side of the TUNE bar to move to the beginning of the next folder. Press the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip to the next folder, and the ▼ side to move to the beginning of the current folder. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous folder. FOLDER REPEAT − This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed. To activate folder repeat, press and hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You will see FOLDER REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the TUNE bar also turns off folder repeat. FOLDER RANDOM − This feature, when activated, plays all files in the selected folder in random order, rather than in the order they are compressed. To activate folder random, press and hold the RDM button. You will see FOLDER RANDOM in the display. The system then selects and plays files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random by pressing the RDM button again, or if you select a different folder with the TUNE bar. TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) − To continuously replay a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), press and release the RPT button (preset 1). You will see TRACK REPEAT in the display. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. 176 TRACK RANDOM (Random within a disc/folder) − This feature plays the tracks/files within a disc in random order. To activate track random, press and release the RDM button (preset 2). You will see TRACK RANDOM in the display. Press the RDM button again to return to normal play. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：３９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８２ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) Pressing either SKIP button (preset 5 or 6) also turns off scan. In MP3 or WMA mode FOLDER SCAN − This feature, when activated, samples all the first files in each folder on the disc in order. To activate folder scan, press and hold the SCAN button for 2 seconds. You will see FOLDER SCAN in the display. The system plays the first file in each folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system then plays the first file in each folder for 10 seconds each. After playing the first file of the last folder, the system goes to normal playing. Pressing either SKIP button (preset 5 or 6), or selecting a different folder with the TUNE bar, or pressing the SCAN button, also turns off folder scan. Using a Track List FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON Features SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − The scan function samples all tracks (files in MP3 or WMA) in the order they were recorded. To activate scan, press and release the SCAN button. You will see TRACK SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press the SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track/file sampled. FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON You can also select a track/file directly from a track list on the audio display. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio display, then touch the Track List icon. The track list menu appears on the display. CONTINUED 177 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：４５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８３ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) When playing a CD recorded with text data, each track name is shown in the audio display. With a disc recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder number and the location are also displayed. If the disc was not recorded with text data, only the track number is shown. To scroll through the display, touch the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the screen. To go back to the previous display, touch the Return icon on the screen. Select the desired track/file by touching the icon on the display. The selected icon will be highlighted in blue. The system begins to play the selected track/file. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon on the upper left of the screen to move to the parent folder. The current folder is highlighted in blue. To Stop Playing a Disc To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM/FM button or touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1＊, or XM2＊ icon. If a PC card is in the audio unit, touch the CARD icon to play the PC card. If a CD or CDs are loaded in the CD changer, touch the CDC icon to play the CD changer. Press the CD button again or touch the CD icon to switch back to the disc player. If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off. ＊ : U.S. EX-L model only 178 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３１：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８４ Playing a disc (Models with navigation system) Removing a Disc Protecting Discs For information on how to handle and protect discs, see page 202 . Features To remove a disc from the audio unit, fold back the screen by pressing the OPEN button (see page 174 ). Press the disc eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload it after 10 seconds and put it in pause mode. To begin playing, press the CD button. To return the screen to the upright position, press the CLOSE button. You cannot close the screen if a disc is partially inserted into its slot. You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off. 179 ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８５ Disc Player Error Message (Models with navigation system) If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer. Error Message DISC ERROR Cause FOCUS Error The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc. MECH ERROR If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer. 180 DISC HEAT ERROR Mechanical Error TOC Error High Temperature Solution Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Check the disc for damage or deformation. If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected, see your dealer. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Check the disc for damage or deformation. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８６ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) Canadian EX-L model U.S. EX-L model CD ICON CD ICON CD CHANGER ICON POWER/VOLUME KNOB JOYSTICK OPEN BUTTON CD BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON CD BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON TUNE BAR JOYSTICK Features OPEN BUTTON SCAN BUTTON CD CHANGER ICON POWER/VOLUME KNOB SCAN BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON SKIP＋BUTTON SKIP−BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON REWIND BUTTON TUNE BAR RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON SKIP＋BUTTON SKIP−BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON REWIND BUTTON 181 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８７ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) Loading CDs in the Changer Your vehicle has the CD changer in the center console. CD-R, CD-RW disc, and CD compressed in MP3 and WMA will not work in this unit. Video CDs and DVD discs also will not work. Do not spill any liquids on the center console. Spilled liquids can damage electrical components in the CD changer. EJECT BUTTON 1. Open the center console cover, then slide open the CD changer cover by pulling it rearward. 182 2. Push the EJECT button to remove the CD magazine. The magazine will pop up automatically. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８８ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) 4. Put a CD on the tray with the printed surface facing up as shown. 5. Reinstall the tray in the magazine. Repeat this procedure to open the other five trays. Features 3. To install a CD into the magazine, push the button while pulling out on the tab. 6. Store all six trays in the magazine, and reinstall the magazine in the CD changer as shown. 7. Make sure to slide the CD changer cover closed until it clicks. To remove CDs from the CD changer, refer to the loading procedure. 183 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１８９ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) To Play a CD To play CDs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You operate the CD changer with the same controls used for the indash disc player or the radio. To select the CD changer, touch the CDC icon. The disc and track numbers are displayed. The system will continuously play a CD until you change modes. Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. 184 To select a different disc, press the ▲ or ▼ side of the TUNE bar. If you select an empty position in the CD changer, the system will try to load the CD in the next available slot. TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS You can use the preset buttons while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks. Each preset button function is shown on the bottom of the screen. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：３６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９０ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) SKIP − Push the button (preset 6) to play the next track on the disc. Push the button (preset 5) once to replay the track in play; press it twice to replay the previous track. REPEAT (Track Repeat) − To continuously replay a track, press and release the RPT button (preset 1). You will see TRACK REPEAT in the display. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. DISC REPEAT − To continuously replay the current CD, press and hold the RPT button (preset 1) until you see the DISC REPEAT in the display. Press it again to turn it off. DISC SCAN − Press and hold the SCAN button to get a 10 second sampling of the first song of each disc in the CD changer. You will see DISC SCAN in the display. Press and hold the button again to turn it off. Features FF/REW − To move more rapidly within a track, press and hold the (preset 4) or (preset 3) button. RANDOM (Track Random) − Press and release the RDM button (preset 2) to play the tracks in random order. You will see TRACK RANDOM in the display. Press the RDM button again to return to normal play. DISC RANDOM − To play all tracks in each CD in random order, press and hold the RDM button (preset 2) until you see DISC RANDOM in the display. Press the RDM button again to return to normal play. SCAN (Track Scan) − The SCAN function samples all the tracks on the selected disc in the order they are recorded. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button. You will see TRACK SCAN in the display, and you will get a 10 second sampling of each track on the selected CD. Press the SCAN button again to get out of scan mode. 185 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９１ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) To Stop Playing a CD Press the AM/FM or CD/XM＊ button to switch to the radio or satellite radio while a CD is playing. If there is a PC card in the audio unit, touch the CARD icon to switch to the PC card while a CD is playing. Touch the CDC icon again to play the CD in the CD changer. If you turn the system off while a CD in the CD changer is playing, the CD will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the CD will be in pause mode. Touch the CDC icon on the audio screen. The CD will begin playing where it left off. ＊ : On U.S. EX-L model only 186 ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：２２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９２ CD Changer (Models with navigation system) If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer. Error Message DISC ERROR Cause FOCUS Error MECH ERROR If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. Mechanical Error The disc is pulled out. Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Check the disc for damage or deformation. If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error message does not disappear after the disc is ejected, see your dealer. The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer. 187 Features The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc. Solution ０６／０７／０５ １２：３２：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９３ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Canadian EX-L model U.S. EX-L model TRACK LIST ICON TRACK LIST ICON POWER/VOLUME KNOB PC CARD ICON OPEN BUTTON CD/XM BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON TUNE BAR JOYSTICK PC CARD ICON JOYSTICK OPEN BUTTON CD/AUX BUTTON AUDIO BUTTON SCAN BUTTON TUNE BAR PLAY MODE ICON SKIP − BUTTON FAST REPEAT BUTTON FORWARD BUTTON REWIND BUTTON PLAY MODE ICON RANDOM BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON 188 POWER/VOLUME KNOB SKIP ＋ BUTTON SKIP − BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON REWIND BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON SKIP ＋ BUTTON ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９４ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) To Play a PC card You operate the PC card player with the same controls used for the radio and the disc player. To load or play a card, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, the recommended PC cards for the PC card reader are: CompactFlash Flash ATA SD memory card NOTE: When you insert a PC card into the slot, make sure you put it in straight. If you cannot insert it, remove it, and insert again. Do not keep PC cards in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage them. To avoid damaging the card reader, do not insert hard disc drive cards into the PC card slot. Never insert foreign objects into the PC card slot. The specifications for compatible MP3 files are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) −Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160/192/224/256/ 320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/ 80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers You cannot close the screen (move it to the upright position) until the PC card is inserted all the way into its slot or removed. 189 Features The PC card player reads and plays cards in MP3 or WMA formats. Depending on the format, the screen will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when a card is playing. The card limit of the player is 255 folders and 999 tracks. If the card has a complex structure, it takes some time for the system to begin playing it. Always use the recommended memory card with the appropriate adapter (if an adapter is needed). Some memory cards will not work in this unit. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９５ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) The specifications for compatible WMA files are: −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz −Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps −Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session −Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers In WMA format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, it skips that file and plays the next available folder or file. 190 Loading a PC Card PC CARD SLOT Insert a PC card straight into the slot. The drive will read the PC card and begin to play it. Return the screen to the upright position by pressing the CLOSE button on the edge of the screen panel. Push the AUDIO button beside the screen to show the audio display and operate the PC card player. The PC card slot is behind the navigation screen. To use the PC card player, press the OPEN button beside the screen. The screen folds back, and the PC card slot appears. You can also operate the audio system without using the control icons on the audio screen. Press any of the appropriate control buttons. The status bar appears on the bottom of the screen. On the navigation screen, you can see the audio information whenever you touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the screen. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９６ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) There are three play modes: Folder, Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY MODE icon, then choose one of the modes by touching its icon. When a mode is selected, it is highlighted in blue. To Select a Play Mode FOLDER MODE PLAY MODE ICON MODE INDICATOR Features Folder mode plays tracks in the order they were added to the card. Artist mode plays tracks in alphabetical order, by artist and song title. Album mode plays albums (folders) in alphabetical order. PLAY MODE ICON ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE PLAY MODE ICON If play mode information was not included in the tracks/files when they were added to the card, it will not be displayed on the screen. MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR U.S. model is shown 191 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９７ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) PLAY MODE ICON U.S. EX-L model is shown To select a play mode, push the AUDIO button to show the audio display, then touch the PLAY MODE icon on the display. 192 Select the desired mode by touching the appropriate icon, or move the joystick, then press the ENT. After you select the play mode, the display changes to the selectable playing menu. If you select ‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’ the system goes into the selected play mode after playing the current file. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：４２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９８ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’ the system goes into the selected play mode immediately and begins to play the new track list. To Change or Select Tracks/Files PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION Features To go back to the previous screen, press the CANCEL button on the right side of the screen. To exit the play mode screens, press the AUDIO button. Icons on the screen can also be selected with the joystick. Move the joystick left or right and up or down until the icon is highlighted, then press the ENT on the top of the joystick to select the icon. PRESET BUTTONS U.S. EX-L model is shown You can use the preset buttons while a card is playing to select or change files. Each preset button’s function is shown on the bottom of the screen. CONTINUED 193 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：４８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０１９９ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) SKIP − Each time you press and release (preset 6), the player skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release (preset 5), to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file. FF/REW − To move rapidly within a file, press and hold (preset 4) or (preset 3). FOLDER SELECTION − To select a different folder, press either side of the TUNE bar to move the beginning of the next folder. Press the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip the next folder, and to the ▼ side to move the beginning of the current folder. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous folder. 194 TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) − To continuously replay a file, press and release the RPT button (preset 1). You will see TRACK REPEAT in the display. Press the RPT button again to turn it off. FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM REPEAT − This feature, when activated, replays all the files on the selected folder/artist/album in the order they are recorded or listed. To activate each repeat mode, press and hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You will see FOLDER REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or ALBUM REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder/artist/album. Press and hold the RPT button again to turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, or selecting a different folder/artist/ album with the TUNE bar also turns off the repeat feature. TRACK RANDOM (Random within a folder) − This feature plays the files within a folder in random order. To activate random play, press and release the RDM button (preset 2). You will see TRACK RANDOM in the display. Press the RDM button again to return to normal play. FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM RANDOM − This feature, when activated, plays all files in each folder/artist/album in random order, rather than in the order they are recorded or listed. To activate each random play, push and hold the RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds. You will see FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in the display. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３３：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２００ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) The system then selects and plays files randomly. This continues until you deactivate each random play by pressing the RDM button again. Pressing either of the SKIP buttons (preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan feature. Pressing either of the SKIP buttons (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar, or pressing the SCAN button, also turns off the scan feature. Features SCAN − The SCAN function samples all the files on the PC card in the order they are recorded. To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see TRACK SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file on the PC card. Press the SCAN button again to get out of scan mode and play the last file sampled. FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN − This feature, when activated, samples the first file in each folder/artist/album on the PC card in order. To activate each scan feature, press and hold the SCAN button. You will see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN or ALBUM SCAN in the display. The system plays the first file in the folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system plays the first file in each folder, in order, for 10 seconds each. After playing the first file of the last folder/artist/album, the system returns to normal play. 195 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：０３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０１ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Using a Track List FOLDER ICON TRACK LIST ICON U.S. EX-L model is shown You can also select a file directly from a track list on the audio display. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio display, then touch the Track List icon. The track list menu appears on the display. 196 ARTIST NAME RETURN ICON To scroll through the display, touch the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the screen. To go back to the previous display, touch the Return icon. To play a file, touch its icon on the screen. In folder mode, touch the folder icon on the upper left of the screen to move to the parent folder. The current folder is highlighted in blue. In artist mode, the artist name is also displayed on the right side of each selectable icon. Select the desired file. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０２ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Song Search Function ALBUM NAME SONG SEARCH ICON TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON Features RETURN ICON Folder mode is shown. In album mode, the album name is also displayed on the right side of each selectable icon. Select the desired file. When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from the track list display, the song search menu appears. ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON You can then select any of three modes to search a file: Title by Keyword, Artist, and Album. CONTINUED 197 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：１９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０３ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Searching for a Song Title by Keyword MORE ICON To cancel the selected letter, touch the Delete icon. To select more characters, touch the More icon. The other character list will be shown. Searching for a Song by Artist Name ARTIST LIST FILE LIST DELETE ICON LIST ICON In Title by Keyword mode, enter the title name, or any keyword, by touching the letter icons on the screen. Press the List icon to begin the song search. If you press the CANCEL button on the control panel, the display returns to the mode menu without doing a search. 198 Select the Artist icon, and the artist list appears. Select the desired artist, and the artist’s file list is displayed. After the system searches for a song, a file list is displayed. To scroll through the list, touch the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the screen. Select the desired file by touching the appropriate icon, or moving the joystick and pressing the ENT. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０４ Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system) Searching for a Song by Album Name ALBUM LIST Removing a PC Card To remove a PC card from the audio unit, fold back the screen by pressing the OPEN button (see page ) 174 ). Press the eject button ( to remove the card. If you do not remove it from the slot, you cannot return the screen to the upright position. To return the screen to the upright position, press the CLOSE button. ＊ : U.S. EX-L model Select the Album icon, and the album list appears. Select the desired album, and its song list is displayed. You can then select the desired song from the list. If you turn the system off while a PC card is playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the card will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the card will begin playing where it left off. You can also eject a card when the ignition switch is off. PC Card Player Malfunction If there is a problem with the PC card player, see your dealer. When you leave the vehicle, always remove the PC card from the audio unit. 199 Features To Stop Playing a PC card To play the radio when a PC card is playing, press the AM/FM button or touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1＊, or XM2＊ icon. If a disc is in the audio unit, press the CD button or touch the CD icon to play the disc. If a CD or CDs are in the CD changer, touch the CDC icon to play the disc(s). Touch the CARD icon to switch back to the PC card player. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０５ AM/FM Radio Reception Radio Frequencies The radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands. Those bands cover these frequencies: AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as ‘‘FM101.’’ 200 Radio Reception How well the radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the station’s transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions. A radio station’s signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the station’s signal. Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radio’s reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０６ AM/FM Radio Reception Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems. Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the station’s transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving. Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions. 201 Features As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３４：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０７ Protecting Your Discs General Information When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use. When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the system. Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems. Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping. Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit. 202 Protecting Discs When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge. A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. Never try to insert foreign objects in the system or the magazine. Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０８ Remote Audio Controls MODE BUTTON CH BUTTON The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, disc, a PC card, or CD changer (if a disc(s) or a PC card is loaded). On models with satellite radio system, you can also select XM1 and XM2. On EX, and EX-L models Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel. If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top (＋) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom (−) to go back to the previous station. If you press and hold the CH button (＋) or (−), the system goes into the seek mode. It finds a station with a strong signal. If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA format) each time you press the top (＋) of the CH button. Press the bottom (−) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to return to the previous track/file. You will see the track/file number and the elapsed time. If the disc has text data or is compressed in MP3 or WMA, you can also see any other information (track title, file name, folder name, etc.). CONTINUED 203 Features VOL BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top or bottom of the button and hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２０９ Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use the seek function to select folders. Press and hold the top (＋) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom (−) to skip backward to the previous folder. Auxiliary Input Jack On Navigation model If you are playing a PC card, press the top (＋) of the CH button to advance to the next file. Press the bottom (−) to go back to the previous file. EX-L model LX model Your vehicle has the auxiliary input jack on the front panel, on the center table, or in the console compartment, depending on models. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories. When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the AUX button to select it. EX model 204 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１０ Radio Theft Protection You should have received a card that lists your audio system’s code and serial numbers. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio system’s serial number in this owner’s manual. If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from a dealer. To do this, you will need the system’s serial number. If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the code. On vehicles with navigation system, touch the icon to enter the code number, then touch the Done icon to set the code. The code is on the radio code card included in your owner’s manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing. Features Your vehicle’s audio system will disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific digit code using the preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with navigation system). Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from specific digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible. If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the sequence, then enter the correct code. You have 10 tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again. 205 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１１ Setting the Clock On models without navigation system To set the time, press the CLOCK button until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink. EX and EX-L models without navigation system LX model CLOCK BUTTON (A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar) CLOCK BUTTON (AM) Change the hours by pressing the H (hour) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M (minute) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Press the CLOCK button again to enter the set time. You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, pressing and holding the CLOCK button, then pressing the R button sets the clock back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, the clock sets forward to the beginning of the next hour. 206 HOUR BUTTON (PRESET 4) For example: RESET BUTTON RESET BUTTON (PRESET 6) (PRESET 3) MINUTE BUTTON (PRESET 5) HOUR BUTTON MINUTE BUTTON (PRESET 2) (PRESET 1) 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:52 will reset to 2:00 On models with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically by the GPS. Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：３１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１２ Security System The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the tailgate from the outside with the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock master switch, or remote transmitter. The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself. SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Once the security system is set, opening any door without using the key or the remote transmitter, the hood, or the tailgate will cause the system to alarm. NOTE: Use the remote transmitter to quickly check that the hood, the tailgate, and all doors are closed. Push the lock button twice within 5 seconds. There should be an audible confirmation beep. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. 207 Features The security system will not set if the hood, tailgate, or any of the doors are not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the doors and the tailgate. You can also check the open monitor on the instrument panel (see page 63 ), to see if the doors and the tailgate are fully closed. Since it is not part of the monitor display, manually check the hood. If equipped The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking lights, side marker lights and taillights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the radio. This alarm continues for 2 minutes, then the system resets. To reset an alarming system before the 2 minutes have elapsed, unlock the driver’s door with the key or use the remote transmitter. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１３ Rearview Camera and Monitor On EX-L model with navigation system When in reverse, the touch screen and navigation system ‘‘hard’’ buttons are locked out, except the ‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘▼’’ or ‘‘▲’’ button allows you to adjust the brightness of the rearview camera image. The camera brightness cannot be adjusted by voice control. Whenever you shift to reverse (R) with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the rear view is shown on the navigation system screen. For the best picture, always keep the rearview camera clean, and do not cover the camera lens. To avoid scratching the lens when you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth. 208 Since the rearview camera display area is limited, you should always back up slowly and carefully, and look behind you for obstacles. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１４ Cruise Control Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. Using the Cruise Control RES/ACCEL CRUISE BUTTON 3. Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated. Features Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. CANCEL SET/DECEL 1. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on. 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). 209 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３５：５３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１５ Cruise Control Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your vehicle speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel the cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will come back on. When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed. Changing the Set Speed You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button. Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/ DECEL button. To increase the speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 210 You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways: NOTE: If you need to decrease your speed quickly, use the brakes as you normally would. Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed. To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel goes out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/DECEL button. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１６ Cruise Control Even with the cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed. Tap the brake pedal. Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. Resuming the Set Speed When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake pedal, the system remembers the previously set speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle accelerates to the same speed as before. Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system off and erases the previous cruising speed. 211 Features Resting your foot on the brake pedal causes cruise control to cancel. Canceling Cruise Control You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways: ０６／０７／０５ 212 １２：３６：０４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１７ ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：０７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１８ Before Driving Break-in Period .............................. 214 Fuel Recommendation .................. 214 Service Station Procedures .......... 215 Refueling..................................... 215 Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 216 Opening and Closing the Hood ................................. 217 Oil Check .................................... 218 Engine Coolant Check .............. 218 Fuel Economy ................................ 219 Accessories and Modifications .... 220 Carrying Cargo .............................. 222 213 Before Driving Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２１９ Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation Break-in Period Help assure your vehicle’s future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period: Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration. Do not change the oil until the scheduled maintenance time. Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). Do not tow a trailer. You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced. 214 Fuel Recommendation Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number of 87 or higher. Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic rapping noise that can lead to engine damage. We recommended using a quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, in areas where it is available, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your authorized dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10 % ethanol by volume and up to 15 % MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. For further important fuel-related information, please refer to your Quick Start Guide. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２０ Service Station Procedures Refueling FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. 1. Park with the driver’s side closest to the service station pump. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave some room for the fuel to expand with temperature changes. If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer. 2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling on the handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. TETHER CONTINUED 215 Before Driving Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. The fuel fill cap is attached to the fuel filler with a tether. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door. ０６／０７／０７ １１：３８：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２１ Service Station Procedures 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on (see page 310 ). You will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on the information display. Check Fuel Cap Message The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off. 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches. Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message appears on the information display. Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go off after several days of normal 216 driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another display, press the select/reset knob. If the system still detects a leak in your vehicle’s evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page 310 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：４２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２２ Service Station Procedures Opening and Closing the Hood HOOD RELEASE HANDLE GRIP LATCH SUPPORT ROD 1. Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly. 2. Reach in between the hood and the front grille with your fingers. The hood latch handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up until it releases the hood. Lift the hood. If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated. 3. Holding the grip, pull the support rod out of its clip. Insert the end into the designated hole pointed by an arrow in the hood. To close the hood, lift it up slightly to remove the support rod from the hole. Put the support rod back into its holding clip. Lower the hood to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then let it drop. Make sure it is securely latched. 217 Before Driving CLIP ０６／０７／０５ １２：３６：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２３ Service Station Procedures Oil Check Engine Coolant Check DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK MAX UPPER MARK LOWER MARK MIN Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle). 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole. 218 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. If it is near or below the lower mark, see Adding Engine Oil on page 267 . Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see Adding Engine Coolant on page 270 for information on adding the proper coolant. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２４ Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy Refer to Owner’s Maintenance Checks on page 262 for information about checking other items on your vehicle. Improving Fuel Economy Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed in the information display. See Owner’s Maintenance Checks on page 262 . The build-up of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel mileage and reduces the chance of corrosion. Combine several short trips into one. The air conditioning puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible. Drive moderately. Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking use more fuel. Always drive in the highest gear possible. 219 Before Driving For example, an underinflated tire causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which uses more fuel. Try to maintain a constant speed. Every time you slow down and speed up, your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use cruise control when appropriate. ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２５ Accessories and Modifications Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Honda accessories, can make it unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information. Accessories Your dealer has Honda accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Although non-Honda accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicle’s handling and stability. 220 Before installing any accessory: Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications. When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicle’s computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system. Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance. Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page 312 ) or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle. Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation. Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. In these areas, accessories may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags. ０６／０８／１１ １８：０９：３７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２６ Accessories and Modifications Modifying Your Vehicle Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components, with non-Honda components could seriously affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system. Here are some examples: Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicle’s safety features can make the systems ineffective. Before Driving Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy. Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and other systems. If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer. Raising your vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit can affect the handling and stability. Non-Honda wheels, because they are a universal design, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and will not be compatible with the tire pressure 221 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：２５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２７ Carrying Cargo Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas: DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF＊ DOOR POCKETS UPPER GLOVE BOX CARGO AREA SEAT-BACK POCKETS＊ SEAT UNDER TRAY＊ CENTER CONSOLE COMPARTMENT＊ ＊ : If equipped 222 LOWER GLOVE BOX CENTER POCKET Upper glove box Lower glove box Console compartment Door pockets Seat-back pockets Seat-under Tray (if equipped) Center pocket Cargo area, including the rear seats when folded up or down. Upper and lower cargo areas with the dual deck cargo shelf (if equipped) Roof-rack (if equipped) However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２８ Carrying Cargo Load Limits The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles, and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles. This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from 850 lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the maximum load is 850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs. (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (see page 246 ). In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or the gross axle weight rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. 223 Before Driving Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit: 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 850 lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. [The placard is on the driver’s doorjamb.] ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：４２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２２９ Carrying Cargo Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Compartment Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash. Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats and interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the proper operation of the seats, or proper operation of the sensors under the seats. Keep the lower glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop. 224 If you fold the rear seats up or down, tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop. Also, keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows. If it is higher, it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags. Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area or on a Roof Rack Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible. Tie down items that could be thrown about the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop. On all models except LX Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf with any rear seat folded up or down. Do not stack items higher than the back of the rear seats. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash. If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of carbon monoxide poisoning, follow the instructions on page 54 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：５０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３０ Carrying Cargo If you carry any items on a roof rack, be sure the total weight of the rack and the items does not exceed 165 lbs (75 kg). If you use an accessory roof rack, the roof rack weight limit may be lower. Refer to the information that came with your roof rack. Carring Cargo on the Dual Deck Cargo Shelf On all models except LX On U.S. model is shown Before Driving Do not put any items on the dual deck cargo shelf that could block your view or be thrown around the vehicle during a crash. Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf if the rear seats are folded down. Do not exceed the dual deck cargo shelf load limit of 20 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kg on Canadian models. 225 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３７：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３１ Carrying Cargo Optional Separation Net The separation net can be used to hold back soft, lightweight items stored in the cargo area. Heavy items should be properly secured on the floor of the cargo area. The net may not prevent heavy items from being thrown forward in a crash or a sudden stop. Cargo Hooks HOOK The four hooks on the floor can be used to install a net for securing items. 226 On LX model Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on side panel in the cargo area. They are designed to hold light items. Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs (3 kg). ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３２ Driving This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the automatic transmission. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system, the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and facts you need if you are planning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway. 227 Driving Driving Guidelines ......................... 228 Preparing to Drive ..................... 229 Starting the Engine........................ 230 Automatic Transmission............... 231 Parking ............................................ 236 Braking System.............................. 237 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 238 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System............................. 240 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................................... 242 Towing a Trailer ............................ 245 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome................................. 250 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ................................... 252 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３３ Driving Guidelines Your vehicle has higher ground clearance that allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Because your vehicle rides higher off the ground, it has a high center of gravity that can cause it to roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. 228 Do not modify your vehicle in any way that would raise the center of gravity. Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof. Four-wheel drive models Your vehicle is equipped with a fourwheel drive (4WD) system. When the system senses a loss of frontwheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This gives you better traction and mobility. You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a twowheel drive vehicle. See page 252 for off-highway driving guidelines. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３４ Driving Guidelines Preparing to Drive You should do the following checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle. 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice. 2. Check that the hood is fully closed. 4. Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page 108 ). 7. Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page 79 ). 8. Make sure the doors and the tailgate are securely closed and locked. Driving 3. Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure (see page 288 ). 5. Check the seat adjustment (see page 94 ). 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page 14 ). 10. When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel (see page 59 ). 229 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：２５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３５ Starting the Engine 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery. 3. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal. 4. Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to the START (III) position. Do not hold the key in the START (III) position for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start right away, pause for at least 10 seconds before trying again. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page 80 . 5. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race. 230 6. If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down, and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. If the engine still does not start, return to step 5. The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：３３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３６ Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicators These indicators on the instrument panel show which position the shift lever is in. If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible. Shifting RELEASE BUTTON SHIFT LEVER To shift from any position, press firmly on the brake pedal and press the release button on the side of the shift lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position. CONTINUED 231 Driving U.S. model is shown The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：３９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３７ Automatic Transmission To shift from: P to R R to P N to R D to 2 2 to 1 1 to 2 2 to D D to N N to D R to N D3 to D D to D3 Do this: Press the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button. Move the shift lever. Press the D3 button. Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the side of the shift lever to move it. If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see Shift Lock Release on page 235 . To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park. You must also press the release button to shift into Park. The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch. 232 Reverse (R) − Press the brake pedal and press the release button on the side of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：４７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３８ Automatic Transmission Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear. D3 SWITCH Press the D3 switch on the side of the shift lever to turn this mode on or off; the D3 mode indicator comes on whenever the D3 mode is selected. D3 mode can be turned on or off only when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position and the shift lever is in the D position. D3 MODE INDICATOR When the D3 mode is on, the transmission selects only the first three gears. Use D3 mode when towing a trailer, or to provide engine braking when going down a steep hill. D3 mode can also keep the transmission from cycling between third and fourth gears in stop-and-go driving. CONTINUED 233 Driving Drive (D) − Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 5) for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher engine speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster. D3 Mode ０６／０７／０５ １２：３８：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２３９ Automatic Transmission Shifting out from the D position will cancel the D3 mode, and the D3 indicator will go out. Selecting the D position again will resume the D3 mode and the indicator comes on. Use second gear: For more power when climbing. Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position turns this mode off. When you restart the engine, select the D position and press the D3 mode switch again to use this mode. For starting out on a slippery surface or in deep snow. The D3 mode indicator also comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Second (2) − To shift to second, press the release button on the side of the shift lever. This position locks the transmission in second gear. It does not downshift to first gear when you come to a stop. 234 To increase engine braking when going down steep hills. To help reduce wheel spin. When driving downhill with a trailer. First (1) − To shift from second to first, press the release button on the side of the shift lever. This position locks the transmission in first gear. By upshifting and downshifting through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can operate the transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. If you shift into first position when the vehicle speed is above 31 mph (50 km/h), the transmission shifts into second gear first to avoid sudden engine braking. Engine Speed Limiter If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engine’s computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４０ Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Release This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work. COVER RELEASE BUTTON 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT 4. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot. 5. Push down on the key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral. 6. Remove the key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the right side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine. If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer. 235 Driving 3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover. Using a small flat-tipped screwdriver or metal fingernail file, carefully pry on the edge of the cover to remove it. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４１ Parking Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline. Parking Tips Make sure the moonroof (if equipped) and the windows are closed. Turn off the lights. Set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission. Place any packages, valuables, etc. in the cargo area or take them with you. Lock the doors and the tailgate. On EX and EX-L models Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set. Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire. 236 If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb and set the parking brake. If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb and set the parking brake. Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：２２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４２ Braking System Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear. Braking System Design The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels. Brake Pad Wear Indicators The front and rear disc brakes on all models have audible brake wear indicators. If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them. 237 Driving Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, and reduces their effectiveness. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you. Check your brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious and alert in your driving. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４３ Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the brakes from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it. The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ 238 You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. ABS Indicator If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible. If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page 311 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：３６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４４ Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the front-to-rear braking distribution system may also be shut down. The VSA indicator will come on along with the ABS indicator. A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stop on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without antilock. ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions. Driving Test your brakes as instructed on page 311 . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control. Important Safety Reminders ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with the steering control during braking. ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road. 239 ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：４５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４５ Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engine’s output and by selectively applying the brakes. When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some unusual noise from the modulator. You will also see the VSA activation indicator blink. The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicle’s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle’s entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety. 240 VSA Activation Indicator When VSA activates, you will see the VSA activation indicator blink. Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator If this indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on, or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your dealer. If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, there may be a problem with the VSA system. Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible. If the low tire pressure indicator or TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page 241 ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA off switch again. Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. ０６／０７／０５ １２：３９：５３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４６ Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System VSA Off Switch VSA OFF SWITCH When VSA is off, the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again turns the system back on. In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on. VSA and Tire Sizes Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size and type as your original tires (see page 292 ). If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA. Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off. 241 Driving This switch is under the driver’s side vent. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep. VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４７ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving. Low Tire Pressure Indicator When the low tire pressure indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to the recommended pressure shown on the driver’s doorjamb. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire. Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure indicator may come on unexpectedly. If you cannot make the low tire pressure indicator go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible. 242 Each tire has its own pressure sensor (not including the spare tire). If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure indicator to come on. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４８ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Refer to page 288 for tire inflation guidelines. Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly. information label and in the owner’s manual (see page 290 ). Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator This indicator comes on and stays on if there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system. When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS indicator may also come on and stay on after driving several miles (kilometers). If this happens, the system will shut off and no longer monitor tire pressures. Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible. Driving For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated. If the low tire pressure indicator or TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page 241 ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA off switch again. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the tire 243 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：１６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２４９ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Changing a Tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure indicator will come on. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page 298 ). Each wheel (except the compact spare tire wheel) is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or qualified technician. After you replace the flat tire, the low tire pressure indicator stays on. This is normal; the system is not monitoring the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct. 244 Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５０ Towing a Trailer Your vehicle has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section. Break-In Period Be sure to read the Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 252 if you plan to tow off paved surfaces. Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive. Total Trailer Weight: The maximum allowable weight of the trailer and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing a load that is too heavy can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling and performance. It can also damage the engine and drivetrain. CONTINUED 245 Driving Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km) (see page 214 ). Load Limits ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：３１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５１ Towing a Trailer To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60 % of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) − The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load is 4,560 lbs (2,070 kg). Tongue Load: The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitch should be approximately 10 % of the total trailer weight. Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway. 246 Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) − The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load must not exceed 2,310 lbs (1,050 kg) on the front axle, and 2,290 lbs (1,040 kg) on the rear axle. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) − The maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is 6,060 lbs (2,750 kg) Checking Loads The best way to confirm that all loads are within limits is to check them at a public scale. For public scales in your area, check your local phone book, or contact your trailer dealer or rental agency for assistance. If you cannot get to a public scale, you can estimate the total trailer weight by adding the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer) with everything in or on the trailer. If you normally pull the same load each time you tow a trailer, you can use a suitable scale or a special tongue load gauge to check the tongue load the first time you set up a towing combination (a fully loaded vehicle and trailer), then recheck the tongue load whenever the conditions change. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５２ Towing a Trailer Hitches Any hitch used on your vehicle must be properly bolted to the underbody. slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not let the chains drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes Honda requires that any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or more be equipped with its own electric or surge-type brakes. Trailer Lights Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agencies for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow, and use only equipment designed for your vehicle. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system. No matter how successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard. Driving Towing Equipment and Accessories Towing can require a variety of equipment, depending on the size of your trailer, how it will be used, how much load you are towing, and where you tow. Discuss your needs with your trailer sales or rental agency, and follow the guidelines in this section. Also make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, and local regulations. Safety Chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Make sure the chains are secured to the trailer and hitch, and that they cross under the tongue and can catch the trailer if it becomes unhitched. Leave enough See your trailer dealer or rental agency for more information on installing electric brakes. CONTINUED 247 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４０：５１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５３ Towing a Trailer TAILLIGHT (RED) LEFT TURN SIGNAL (ORANGE) GROUND (BLACK) TRAILER BRAKE HAZARD (WHITE) LIGHT (PINK) (LIGHT GREEN) RIGHT TURN SIGNAL (BROWN) Your vehicle has a trailer lighting connector located behind the left side panel in the cargo area. Refer to the drawing above for the wiring color code and purpose of each pin. If you use a non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, you can get the connector and pins that mate with the connector in your vehicle from your dealer. 248 Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty. Additional Towing Equipment Many states and Canadian provinces require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot. Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation. Pre-Tow Checklist When preparing to tow, and before driving away, be sure to check the following: The vehicle has been properly serviced, and suspension and cooling system are in good operating condition. The trailer has been properly serviced and is in good condition. All weights and loads are within limits. The hitch, safety chains, and any other attachments are secure. All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：０３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５４ Towing a Trailer The lights and brakes on your vehicle and the trailer are working properly. Your vehicle tires and spare are properly inflated, and the trailer tires and spare are inflated as recommended by the trailer maker. For your safety and the safety of others, take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road, and follow the guidelines in this section. Making Turns and Braking Make turns more slowly and wider than normal. The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your vehicle, and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over. Driving on Hills When climbing hills, closely watch your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn the air conditioning off, reduce speed and, if necessary, pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool. When driving down hills, reduce your speed and use the D3 position. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember it will take longer to slow down and stop when towing a trailer. If you must stop when facing uphill, use the foot brake or parking brake. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator, as this can cause the automatic transmission to overheat. Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Crosswinds and air turbulence caused by passing trucks can disrupt your steering and cause the trailer to sway. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed, and steer straight ahead. Do not try to make quick steering or braking corrections. 249 Driving Driving Safely With a Trailer The added weight, length, and height of a trailer will affect your vehicle’s handling and performance, so driving with a trailer requires some special driving skills and techniques. Towing Speeds and Gears Drive slower than normal in all driving situations, and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is the proper shift lever position to use when towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the following column for additional gear information.) ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５５ Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome Backing Up Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel; then turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left, and turn the wheel right to move the trailer to the right. Parking Follow all normal precautions when parking, including firmly setting the parking brake and putting the transmission in Park. Also, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires. Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome at legal highway speeds up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h). Otherwise, severe transmission damage will occur. To avoid damage to the 4WD system, your vehicle must be towed with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). When purchasing a tow bar, make sure you select a reputable manufacturer and installer. Follow the manufacturer’s attachment instructions carefully. Perform the following procedure every day immediately before you begin towing. Otherwise severe automatic transmission damage will occur. 250 Check the transmission fluid level (see page 273 ). Do not overfill. Start the engine. Press on the brake pedal. Move the shift lever through all its positions. Shift to D, then to N. Let the engine run for 3 minutes, then turn it off. Release the parking brake. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock. Make sure the radio and any items plugged into the accessory power sockets are turned off so you do not run down the battery. When you stop towing your vehicle and shift out of the neutral position, you may not be able to move the shift lever from neutral to reverse or Park. If this happens, press the brake pedal and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then shift out of neutral. ０６／１１／２７ １９：１３：０３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５６ Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing. Extended Towing When towing your vehicle for long periods, remove the 7.5 A Accessory Radio fuse to reduce drain on the battery. This fuse is located in the interior fuse box and is shown as number 34 below. INTERIOR FUSE BOX ACCESSORY RADIO FUSE Failure to f ollow the recommended instructions exactly will result in severe automatic transmission damage. If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine, your vehicle must be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer. Severe transmission damage will occur if the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse to neutral and then towed with the drive wheels on the ground. If you tow a CR-V behind a motorhome, the transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first. Only remove the fuse after you have performed the transmission shifting procedure, and the key is in the ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the fuse in an obvious location (center tray, coin pockets, etc) as a reminder to re-install the fuse before driving 251 Driving If you tow more than 8 hours in one day, you should repeat the above procedure at least every 8 hours (when you stop for fuel, etc.) the vehicle. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５７ Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement. But its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, such as campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar locations. It is not designed for trail-blazing, mountain climbing, or other challenging offroad activities. If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills. Your vehicle will also handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. So be sure to read this owner’s manual, pay special attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before you leave the pavement. 252 Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause an accident or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed. Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual. Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit. Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations. Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits (see page 223 and 246 ). Wherever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：４０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５８ Off-Highway Driving Guidelines Check Out Your Vehicle Before you leave the pavement, be sure to do all scheduled maintenance and service, and inspect your vehicle for any problems. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures. Remember The route presents limits (too steep or bumpy roads). You have limits (driving skill and comfort). And your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Driving off-highway can be hazardous if you fail to recognize limits and take the proper precautions. Keep in mind that you will usually need more time and distance to brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces. Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’ the brakes; let the anti-lock braking system pump them for you. Avoiding Obstacles Debris in the road can damage your suspension or other components. Because your vehicle has a high center of gravity, driving over a large obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop into a deep hole can cause your vehicle to tip or roll over. Driving on Slopes If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk the slope before you drive on it. If you have any doubt whether or not you can safely drive on the slope, don’t do it. Find another route. If you are driving up a hill and find that you cannot continue, do not try to turn around. Your vehicle could roll over. Slowly back down the hill, following the same route you took up the hill. 253 Driving After you return to the pavement, carefully inspect your vehicle to make sure there is no damage that could make driving it unsafe. Recheck the condition of the tires and the tire pressures. Accelerating and Braking For better traction on all surfaces, accelerate slowly and gradually build up speed. If you try to start too fast on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you might not have enough traction to get underway, and you may dig yourself a hole. Starting with the shift lever in second (2) gear will help you have a smoother start on snow or ice. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：４７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２５９ Off-Highway Driving Guidelines Crossing a Stream Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings. 254 If You Get Stuck Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud, or other surfaces where you could get stuck. If you do happen to get stuck because of inclement weather or other conditions, choose a safe and appropriate course of action. You should never use a jack to try getting unstuck. A jack only works on firm, level ground. Also, your vehicle could easily slip off the jack and hurt you or someone else. 4-Wheel Drive Vehicles If you spin the wheels excessively trying to get unstuck, you may overheat the components of the 4-wheel drive system. If this happens, the 4-wheel drive system shuts off and only the front wheels receive power. If this happens, stop and allow everything to cool down. The 4-wheel drive system will work again after its temperature drops. If you slip the clutch for a long time while trying to get unstuck, you may overheat and damage it. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４１：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６０ Maintenance This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions. This section also includes instructions on how to read the maintenance minder messages on the information display, a maintenance record, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself. 255 Maintenance If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page 337 for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Maintenance Safety ....................... 256 Maintenance Minder ..................... 257 Maintenance Record ..................... 264 Fluid Locations............................... 266 Adding Engine Oil ......................... 267 Changing the Engine Oil and Filter ............................................ 268 Engine Coolant ............................... 270 Windshield Washers ..................... 272 Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 273 Rear Differential Fluid .................. 275 Brake Fluid ..................................... 275 Power Steering Fluid ..................... 276 Lights .............................................. 277 Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 283 Floor Mats ...................................... 283 Audio Antenna ............................... 284 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 284 Wiper Blades .................................. 285 Tires ................................................ 288 Wheels ............................................ 293 Checking the Battery .................... 294 Vehicle Storage .............................. 295 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６１ Maintenance Safety All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic. Important Safety Precautions To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required. Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off. To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air. 256 Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owner’s manual. Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine. Burns from hot parts. Let the engine and exhaust system cool down before touching any parts. Injury from moving parts. Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so. Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：１０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６２ Maintenance Minder Your vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the information display to show you when you should have your dealer do engine oil replacement and indicated maintenance service. Based on the engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage. Engine Oil Life Display SELECT/RESET KNOB ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 %−91 % 90 %−81 % 80 %−71 % 70 %−61 % 60 %−51 % 50 %−41 % 40 %−31 % 30 %−21 % 20 %−16 % 15 %−11 % 10 %−6 % 5 %−1 % 0% Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 % 90 % 80 % 70 % 60 % 50 % 40 % 30 % 20 % 15 % 10 % 5% 0% CONTINUED 257 Maintenance To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then press and release the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until the engine oil life indicator appears (see page 65 ). The remaining engine oil life is shown on the display according to this table: ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：１６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６３ Maintenance Minder MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR ENGINE LIFE INDICATOR MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S) If the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, you will see the engine oil life indicator every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator will also come on, and the maintenance item code(s) for other scheduled maintenance items needing service will be displayed below the engine oil life indicator. 258 The 15 and 10 percent oil life indicator reminds you that the time is coming soon to take your vehicle in for the required maintenance. When the remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the same maintenance item code(s), every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：２６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６４ Maintenance Minder The maintenance item code or codes indicate the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change (see page 263 ). You can switch the information display from the engine oil life display to the odometer or the average fuel mileage, press and release the Select/Reset knob on the instrument panel. When you see this message, have the indicated maintenance performed by your dealer as soon as possible. When the remaining engine oil life is 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator will blink. The display comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The maintenance minder indicator ( ) also comes on and remains on in the instrument panel. When you see this message, immediately have the indicated maintenance done by your dealer. If you do not perform the indicated maintenance, negative mileage is displayed and begins to blink after the vehicle has been driven 10 miles (10 km) or more. Negative mileage means your vehicle has passed the maintenance required point. Immediately have the indicated maintenance done by your dealer. CONTINUED 259 Maintenance When the engine oil life is 15 to 1 percent, the maintenance minder indicator ( ) comes on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, then it goes out if you switch the information display. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６５ Maintenance Minder To change the information display from the engine oil life display to the odometer or the average fuel mileage, press and release the Select/Reset knob. Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items When the engine oil life is 0 percent or negative mileage, the maintenance minder indicator ( ) remains on even if you change the information display. Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on the following. 260 SUB ITEM (S) MAIN ITEM All maintenance items displayed in the information display are in code. For an explanation of these maintenance codes, see page 263 . Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see ‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the maintenance minder as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Press the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：４５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６６ Maintenance Minder Important Maintenance Precautions If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed. EX and EX-L model 4. Select the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ indicator by turning the Select/Reset knob. The display begins to blink. Push the same knob to enter this setting. Your authorized Honda dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. 5. The engine oil life and the maintenance item code(s) will begin to blink. Push the Select/ Reset knob to reset. 6. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to ‘‘100.’’ CONTINUED 261 Maintenance 3. Press the Select/Reset knob for about 10 seconds. The information display shows the reset mode initial display as shown. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４２：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６７ Maintenance Minder However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Make sure to have the service facility or person reset the display as previously described. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out the maintenance record. Check your warranty booklet for more information. We recommend using Honda parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability. 262 U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards. Engine oil level − Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page 218 . According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with ＃ will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display. Automatic transmission − Check the fluid level monthly. See page 273 . Owner’s Maintenance Checks You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed. Engine coolant level − Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page 218 . Brakes − Check the fluid level monthly. See page 275 . Tires − Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page 288 . Lights − Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate light monthly. See page 277 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６８ Maintenance Minder Symbol A B ＊ 1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. ＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 262 . NOTE: Symbol 1 2 3 4 5 6 Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differencial fluid＊2 ＊ 2 : 4WD Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. 263 Maintenance Minder Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil＊1 Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect these items: Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system＃ Fuel lines and connections＃ ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２６９ Maintenance Record You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s) completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet. Mileage Maintenance Performed Signature Mileage Maintenance Performed Signature Date 264 Date mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７０ Maintenance Record Mileage Maintenance Performed Signature Mileage Maintenance Performed Signature Date Date A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi km A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 Maintenance mi km 265 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７１ Fluid Locations ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID (Black cap) ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange handle) WASHER FLUID (Blue cap) POWER STEERING FLUID (Red cap) ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop) RADIATOR CAP 266 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７２ Adding Engine Oil Adding Engine Oil above the upper mark; you could damage the engine. ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the container’s label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level on the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill Ambient Temperature 267 Maintenance API CERTIFICATION SEAL Honda Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７３ Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter Synthetic Oil You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API certification seal, and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the information display. Changing the Engine Oil and Filter Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly. Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability. Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled mechanic. 268 WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off. 2. Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：４５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７４ Changing the Engine Oil and Filter OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to: 29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) 6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil. Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the engine block. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter. 4. Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it. 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work. Maintenance 3. Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required. Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground. 8. Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks. 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil. 269 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４３：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７５ Engine Coolant Adding Engine Coolant RESERVE TANK If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. 270 Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water. If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator. Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７６ Engine Coolant RADIATOR CAP 4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment. 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully. Maintenance 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down. 3. Remove the radiator cap by pushing it down and turning it counterclockwise. 271 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７７ Windshield Washers Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use. Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather. LEVEL GAUGE When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges. Check the fluid level by removing the cap and looking at the level gauge. On Canadian models: The low washer level indicator comes on when the level is low (see page 65 ). 272 Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’s paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：１５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２７８ Automatic Transmission Fluid 4. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. DIPSTICK UPPER MARK LOWER MARK 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Start the engine let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds before going step 2, but don’t wait longer than 90 seconds. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment. 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration. CONTINUED 273 Maintenance Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature. 5. If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：２０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ Automatic Transmission Fluid Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission fluid). If it’s not available, you may use a DEXRON III automatic transmission fluid as a temporary replacement. However, continued use can affect the shift quality. Have the transmission flushed and refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer as soon as it is convenient. 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration. Make sure the rubber cap on the dipstick fits in the dipstick guide and that you push the dipstick in all the way. If you are not sure how to add fluid, contact your dealer. 274 ０２７９ ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８０ Rear Differential Fluid, Brake Fluid Rear Differential Fluid 4WD model only The rear differential should be drained and refilled with new fluid according to the maintenance messages shown on the information display. Have your dealer replace the rear differential fluid. Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid only. Do not use automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Brake Fluid Check the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir monthly. MAX Replace the brake fluid according to the maintenance messages shown on the information display. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads. Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. 275 Maintenance Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８１ Power Steering Fluid UPPER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL Check the level on the side of the reservoir when the engine is cold. The fluid should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not, add power steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment. 276 Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. You may use another power steering fluid as an emergency replacement, but have the power steering system flushed and refilled with Honda PSF as soon as possible. A low power steering fluid level can indicate a leak in the system. Check the fluid level frequently, and have the system inspected as soon as possible. Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４４：４２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８２ Lights Headlight Aiming The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or pull a trailer, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or other qualified technician. Replacing a Headlight Bulb Your vehicle has halogen headlight bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. 1. Open the hood. To change the headlight bulb on the driver’s side, remove the under-hood fuse box from its stay by pulling it out of its stay. CONTINUED 277 Maintenance Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. ０６／０７／０７ １７：１８：０３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８３ Lights 5. Install the new bulb into the hole, making sure the tabs are in their slots. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clip the end into the slot. 6. Install the rubber seal over the back of the headlight assembly. Make sure one of the three arrows on the rubber seal is facing up; it is marked ‘‘→.’’ 2. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling the connector straight back. 7. Push the electrical connector onto the new bulb. Make sure it is connected securely. Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb. 3. Remove the rubber weather seal by pulling on the tab. 8. (Driver’s side) Reinstall the under-hood fuse box. 4. Unclip the end of the hold-down wire from its slot. Pivot it out of the way, and remove the bulb. 278 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８４ Lights 4. Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. Replacing a Front Turn Signal Light Bulb 5. Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 6. (Driver’s side) Reinstall the coolant reserve tank. To change the turn signal bulb on the driver’s side, remove the engine coolant reserve tank by pulling it out of its holder. Maintenance 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms. 279 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：０９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８５ Lights 4. Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place. Replacing a Parking Light/Front Side Marker Light Bulb FUSE BOX 5. Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 6. (Driver’s side) Reinstall the fuse box in place securely. On the passenger’s side 1. Open the hood. To change the parking light/front side marker on the driver’s side, remove the fuse box from its stay by pulling out. 280 2. Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８６ Lights Replacing Rear Bulbs BULBS COVER SCREWS BULBS 2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the taillight assembly mounting screw under each cover. 3. Pull the taillight assembly out of the rear pillar. 4. Determine which of the four bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight, backup light, turn signal, or side marker. 5. Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. CONTINUED 281 Maintenance 1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on the edge of the cover. Remove the covers by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８７ Lights 6. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms. Replacing a High-mount Brake Light Bulb 7. Reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks. 8. Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working. 9. Align the clips on the taillight assembly with the holes in the body, then push the taillight assembly into place. Tighten the two mounting screws securely and reinstall the covers. 1. Open the tailgate. Unlatch the top of the cover by pulling back on it with hands. 2. Place a cloth on the side edge of the cover. Remove the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver and pulling the cover off. 3. Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 282 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：３８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８８ Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats LOOP If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle. Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the insides of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol. The driver’s floor mat that came with your vehicle hooks over the floor mat anchors. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the pedals. CONTINUED 283 Maintenance 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its socket. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms. 5. Press the brake pedal to make sure the new bulb is working. 6. Put the socket back into the light assembly, and turn it clockwise to lock it in place. 7. Put the cover back on the light assembly. Push it in until it locks in place. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：４４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２８９ Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle. Audio Antenna If you use a non-Honda floor mat, make sure it fits properly and that it can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats. Your vehicle is equipped with an antenna at the rear of the roof . Bef ore using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash, remove the antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the antenna f rom being damaged by the car wash brushes. 284 Dust and Pollen Filter This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the heating and cooling system. Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the heating and cooling system becomes less than usual. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４５：５４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９０ Wiper Blades Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used. Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and the wiper arms. When replacing a wiper blade, make sure not to drop the wiper blade or wiper arm down on the windshield. BLADE FRONT WIPER ARMS To replace a front wiper blade: 1. Raise each wiper arm off the windshield, lifting the driver’s side first, then the passenger’s side. 2. Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm: 3. Remove the blade from its holder by grasping the tabbed end of the blade. Pull firmly until the tabs come out of the holder. Press and hold the lock tab. Slide the blade assembly toward the lock tab until it releases from the wiper arm. CONTINUED 285 Maintenance LOCK TAB ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９１ Wiper Blades 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade. REINFORCEMENT 6. Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place. 7. Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield, the passenger’s side first, then the driver’s side. BLADE TOP 5. Place the top of the wiper blade on the end of the blade assembly, and slide the blade onto the assembly in the direction pointed to by the arrow. Make sure the blade is completely installed. Make sure the three rubber tabs inside the blade fit to each notch of the rein-forcement, as shown. 286 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９２ Wiper Blades 5. Slide the new blade into the holder. Make sure it is engaged in the slot along its full length. Insert both ends of the blade into the holder. Make sure they are secure. REAR 6. Install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place. 7. Lower the wiper arm against the windshield. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window. 2. Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by pivoting the blade assembly upward. 3. Pull one end of the blade out from the holder. Slide the blade out of the holder. Maintenance To replace a rear wiper blade: 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade. 287 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：１９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９３ Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated. The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced. Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. 288 Inflation Guidelines Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly. The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warns you when a tire pressure is low. See page 242 for more information. Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９４ Tires Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time. Recommended Tire Pressures The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal and high-speed driving conditions. Tire Size 225/65R17 102T You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges. While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure. Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving Front/Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) The compact spare tire pressure is: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. For additional information about your tires, see page 324 . 289 Maintenance Check the air pressures when the tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on this page. If you check air pressures when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold readings. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be underinflated. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：３８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９５ Tires Tire Inspection Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear. INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS You should look for: Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord. Excessive tread wear. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators. 290 Tire Maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance. On vehicles with aluminum wheels, improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda wheel weights f or balancing. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：４８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９６ Tires Tire Rotation Front Front (For Non-directional (For Directional Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate. Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work on that tire. Replacement wheels are available at your dealer. CONTINUED 291 Maintenance To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the diagram each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back. When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked. Replacing Tires and Wheels Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). ０６／０７／０５ １２：４６：５８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９７ Tires Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual. Winter Driving Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions. For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions. Snow Tires Wheel and Tire Specifications Wheels: 17 x 6 1/2J Tires: 225/65R17 102T See page 324 for DOT tire quality grading information, and page 326 for tire size and labeling information. 292 If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations. Tire Chains Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ cable-type traction devices, with rubber chain tensioners, on the front tires. Use traction devices only when required by driving conditions or local laws. Make sure they are the correct size for your tires. Metal linktype ‘‘chains’’ should not be used. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：０４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９８ Tires, Wheels When installing cables, follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and mount them as tight as you can. Make sure they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads. If equipped Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge. Maintenance Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. Wheels Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly. 293 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０２９９ Checking the Battery TEST INDICATOR WINDOW cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion. If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your dealer or a qualified technician. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicator’s colors. Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder). To remove it, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a 294 If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative (−) cable first, and reconnect it last. The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation. A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you. Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance. If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page 205 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３００ Vehicle Storage If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors. Block the rear wheels. If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground. Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. Wash and dry the exterior completely. Support the front and rear wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield. Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry. Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in Park. If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month. Maintenance Fill the fuel tank. Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors). Cover the vehicle with a ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint. To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and tailgate seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and tailgate seals. 295 ０６／０７／０５ 296 １２：４７：２４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０１ ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：２７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０２ Taking Care of the Unexpected This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed. Compact Spare Tire....................... 298 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 299 If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 303 Jump Starting ................................. 305 If the Engine Overheats ............... 307 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 309 Charging System Indicator........... 309 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 310 Brake System Indicator ................ 311 Fuses ............................................... 312 Fuse Locations ............................... 315 Emergency Towing ....................... 317 Taking Care of the Unexpected 297 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：３６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０３ Compact Spare Tire Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can. Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire. Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model. Follow these precautions: Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving. 298 INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Do not use the compact spare tire if you are towing a trailer. The low tire pressure indicator stays on when you are driving with the compact spare tire. The TPMS indicator may also come on after several miles (kilometers) driving. TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：４５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０４ Changing a Flat Tire If you have a flat tire while driving, stop in a safe place to change it. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an exit or an area to stop that is far away from the traffic lanes. SPARE TIRE The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. TOOLS JACK 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park. Apply the parking brake. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer. 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire. 3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo area floor lid by lifting up with the strap, and remove it from cargo area by disengaging the tabs. When you store the flat tire in the spare tire well, do not reinstall the cargo area floor lid forcibly. This will damage the tabs on the lid. 4. Take the tool kit out of the spare tire. CONTINUED 299 Taking Care of the Unexpected Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４７：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０５ Changing a Flat Tire WHEEL NUT WRENCH JACKING POINT JACK 5. Take the jack out of the spare tire area. Turn the jack’s end bracket counterclockwise to loosen it, then remove the jack by lifting it straight up. 6. Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well. 300 7. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench. 8. Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０６ Changing a Flat Tire 12. Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully. 13. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack. EXTENSION WHEEL NUT WRENCH 10. Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Handle the wheel nuts carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up. 11. Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving. CONTINUED 301 Taking Care of the Unexpected 9. Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground. BRAKE HUB ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０７ Changing a Flat Tire 19. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock it in place. Store the tools, and place the cover on the flat tire of the cargo area. For spare For normal tire tire 14. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to: 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m) 15. Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire. 302 16. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well. Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. 17. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt. 20. Store the center cap in the spare tire well. Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged. 18. Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole. 21. Close the tailgate. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：１９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０８ If the Engine Won’t Start Diagnosing why the engine won’t start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position: You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engine’s starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock. The transmission must be in Park or neutral or the starter will not operate. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See Jump Starting on page 305 . Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position. If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See Emergency Towing on page 317 . If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connections (see page 294 ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page 305 ). 303 Taking Care of the Unexpected You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run. Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all. Check these things: ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：２６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３０９ If the Engine Won’t Start The Starter Operates Normally In this case, the starter motor’s speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, but the engine does not run. Are you using a properly coded key? An improperly coded key will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page 61 ). Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to Starting the Engine on page 230 . 304 Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the low fuel indicator may not be working. There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page 312 ). If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See Emergency Towing on page 317 . ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１０ Jump Starting Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions. A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture. 2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, stereo system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake. BOOSTER BATTERY The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables. 3. Connect one jumper cable to the positive (＋) terminal on your battery. Connect the other end to the positive (＋) terminal on the booster battery. CONTINUED 305 Taking Care of the Unexpected You cannot start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it. To Jump Start Your Vehicle: 1. Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or frozen, do not try jump starting until it thaws. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：４１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１１ Jump Starting 5. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. 6. Start your vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. 4. Connect the second jumper cable to the negative (−) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the stud bolt on the engine side as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine. 306 7. Once your vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：４９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１２ If the Engine Overheats The reading of the vehicle’s temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). If the vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning indicators. 4. If the temperature gauge reading stays at the red mark, turn off the engine. 2. If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood. CONTINUED 307 Taking Care of the Unexpected Driving with the temperature gauge reading at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine. Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. 3. If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running, and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge reading comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４８：５７ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１３ If the Engine Overheats 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see Emergency Towing on page 317 ). 6. If you don’t find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark. 7. If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the reading reaches the middle of the temperature gauge or lower before checking the radiator. 308 Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. 8. Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off. 9. Start the engine, and set the temperature control dial to maximum heat. Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can. 10. Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see Emergency Towing on page 317 ). 11. If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：０６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１４ Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning lights. Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped. 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page 267 ). 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page 218 ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers. 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see Emergency Towing on page 317 ). Charging System Indicator If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged. Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly. Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance. Taking Care of the Unexpected Low Oil Pressure Indicator This indicator should never come on when the engine is running. If it starts flashing or stays on, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action. 309 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：１４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１５ Malfunction Indicator Lamp If the indicator comes on while driving, it means one of the engine’s emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicle’s performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once. Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving. If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may turn off as you continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible. If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicle’s emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicle’s warranties. The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator. Readiness Codes Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed. 310 If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes are erased. It can take several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again. To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for a state emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to State Emissions Testing for more information (see page 332 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１６ Brake System Indicator U.S. Canada The brake system indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and as a reminder to check the parking brake. It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake. If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads. If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately. Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired as soon as possible (see Emergency Towing on page 317 ). Taking Care of the Unexpected If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page 275 ). However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the system’s dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully. 311 ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：２８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１７ Fuses INTERIOR FUSE UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY) FUSE LABEL The vehicle’s fuses are contained in two fuse boxes. The interior fuse box is located under the dashboard on the driver’s side. The fuse label is attached under the steering column. 312 TAB The under-hood fuse box is on the driver’s side. To open it, push the tabs as shown. Checking and Replacing Fuses If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, check for a blown fuse first. Determine from the chart on pages 315 and 316 , or the diagram on the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses control that device. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is the cause. Replace any blown fuses, and check if the device works. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：３６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１８ Fuses FUSE BLOWN FUSE BLOWN FUSE PULLER 2. Remove the cover from the fuse box. 3. Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking through the side window at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver. 4. Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse box by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover. CONTINUED 313 Taking Care of the Unexpected 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off. ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３１９ Fuses BLOWN 5. Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower. Your vehicle has spare fuses on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover. 314 If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket or radio). If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate anything wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can. Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating. 6. If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem in your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician. If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the digit code (see page 205 ). On vehicles with a navigation system, touch the appropriate icon to enter the code number (see page 205 ). ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：４９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２０ Fuse Locations INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. 7.5 A 15 A 10 A 7.5 A (15 A) (20 A) − 10 A 7.5 A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 15 A Power Window Relay Fuel Pump ACG ABS/VSA Heated Seats＊ Front Fog Lights＊ Not used Rear Wiper ODS (Ocupant Detection System) Meter SRS Right Headlight High Beam Left Headlight High Beam Small Light (Interior) Small Light (Exterior) Right Headlight Low Beam Left Headlight Low Beam Main Headlight High Beam Small Lights MAIN No. Amps. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 7.5 A 20 A − − (20 A) 20 A 20 A (20 A) 15 A 15 A 20 A (15 A) 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 20 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 7.5 A 30 A Circuits Protected TPMS Headlight Low Beam Not used Not used Moonroof ＊ Door Lock Front Left Power Window HAC Option Rear Accessory Socket Accessory Front Right Power Window Accessory Power Socket on the Center Table＊ Rear Right Power Window Rear Left power window ACC Radio ACC Key lock HAC Daytime Running Lights Front Wiper ＊ : If equipped 315 Taking Care of the Unexpected 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Circuits Protected ０６／０７／０５ １２：４９：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２１ Fuse Locations UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. Amps. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 316 100 A (70 A) 80 A 50 A 20 A 40 A 50 A 40 A (30 A) 20 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 15 A 15 A 15 A Circuits Protected Battery EPS＊ Option Main Ignition Switch Main ABS/VSA FSR ABS/VSA Motor Headlight Main Power Window Main EPT-R ＊ Sub Fan Motor Main Fan Motor Rear Defogger Blower Hazard LAF Stop and Horn No. Amps. 13 (20 A) 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 (20 A) 7.5 A (30 A) (15 A) 15 A 15 A 7.5 A 15 A 7.5 A 10 A ＊ : If equipped Circuits Protected Power Seat DR RR HI/ Reclining＊ Power Seat DR FR HI/Sliding＊ IGPS OIL LEVEL EPT-L ＊ High Power Sound＊ IG Coil FI Main MG Clutch DBW Interior Light Back Up ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：０２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２２ Emergency Towing If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Refer to Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome on page 250 for non-emergency towing information. The only way you can safely tow your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment. The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required. Taking Care of the Unexpected On 4WD models Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the 4WD system. It should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer. 317 ０６／０７／０５ 318 １２：５０：０４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２３ ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２４ Technical Information The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicle’s tires and emissions control systems. Identification Numbers ................. 320 Specifications ................................. 322 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 324 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................................... 324 Treadwear .................................. 324 Traction....................................... 324 Temperature .............................. 325 Tire Labeling .................................. 326 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation............................. 327 319 Technical Information Emissions Controls........................ 329 The Clean Air Act ...................... 329 Crankcase Emissions Control System..................................... 329 Evaporative Emissions Control System..................................... 329 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery ................................. 329 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 330 PGM-FI System ..................... 330 Ignition Timing Control System................................. 330 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System .................... 330 Three Way Catalytic Converter ............................ 330 Replacement Parts..................... 330 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 331 State Emissions Testing ............... 332 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：１３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２５ Identification Numbers Your vehicle has several identifying numbers located in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the driver’s side. It is also on the certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label. To access the VIN in the engine compartment, pull down the lid on the back of the engine compartment. Make sure to close the lid before closing the hood. 320 CERTIFICATION LABEL ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：１８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２６ Identification Numbers The engine number is stamped into the front of the engine block. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER You can see the engine number through the window next to the ‘‘H’’ logo. The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission. Technical Information ENGINE NUMBER 321 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：３４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２７ Specifications Dimensions Length Width Height Wheelbase Track Front Rear Weights Gross vehicle weight rating Engine Type Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs Capacities Fuel tank Engine oil 322 177.9 in (4,518 mm) 71.6 in (1,820 mm) 66.1 in (1,680 mm) 103.1 in (2,620 mm) 61.6 in (1,565 mm) 61.6 in (1,565 mm) See the certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb. Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine 3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm) 144 cu-in (2,354 cm ) 9.7 : 1 IZFR6K-11 (NGK) SKJ20DR-M11 (DENSO) Approx. 15.3 US gal (58 ) Change＊1 Including filter Without filter Total 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) 5.6 US qt (5.3 ) Capacities Change＊2 Engine Total coolant Change Automatic 4WD transmission 2WD fluid Total 4WD 2WD Change Rear Total differential fluid (4WD) U.S. Vehicles Windshield Canada washer Vehicles reservoir 1.32 US gal (5.0 ) 1.88 US gal (7.1 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) 2.7 US qt (2.6 ) 7.6 US qt (7.2 7.4 US qt (7.0 1.3 US qt (1.2 1.5 US qt (1.4 ) ) ) ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) 4.8 US qt (4.5 ) ＊1 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine ＊2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 ) ０６／０７／０５ １２：５０：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２８ Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type HFC-134a (R-134a) 15.2−16.8 oz (430−480 g) SP-10 Fuses Interior See page 315 or the fuse label attached under the steering column. See page 316 or the fuse box cover. Under-hood Lights Headlights High/Low Front turn signal lights Parking lights/side marker lights Rear turn signal lights Stop/Taillights Back-up lights License plate light Ceiling light Spotlights Cargo area light Rear side marker lights High-mount brake light 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V − − − − − − − − − 21 W (Amber) 21/5 W 21 W 5W 8W 8W 8W 3 CP 21 W Alignment Toe-in Camber Caster Tires Size Pressure Front Rear Front Rear Front Front/Rear Spare Front Rear Spare 0.0 in (0 mm) 0.08 in (2.0 mm) 0° −1°00’ 1°45’ 225/65R17 102T T155/90D17 101M 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Technical Information Battery Capacity 12 V − 50/55 W (HB2) 12 V − 21 W (Amber) 12 V − 3 CP 12 V − 36 AH/5 HR 12 V − 47 AH/20 HR 323 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：０４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３２９ DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and the maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. 324 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction − AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３０ DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Technical Information Temperature − A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 325 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：２３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３１ Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. 102 − Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). T Tire Size Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Below is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 225/65R17 102T − Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). Tire Identification Number The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. 225 − Tire width in millimeters. DOT B97R FW6X 2202 65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). R − Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17 − Rim diameter in inches. DOT − This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R − Manufacturer’s identification mark. FW6X − Tire type code. 326 2202 − Date of manufacture. Maximum Tire Pressure Max Press − The maximum air pressure the tire can hold. Maximum Tire Load Max Load − The maximum load the tire can carry at maximum air pressure. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３２ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. 327 Technical Information CONTINUED ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３３ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale, which displays the symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. 328 Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：４３ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３４ Emissions Controls The burning of gasoline in your vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas. The Clean Air Act The United States Clean Air Act＊ sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work. ＊ In Canada, Honda vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are manufactured. Evaporative Emissions Control System As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving. Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off. 329 Technical Information Crankcase Emissions Control System Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engine’s crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：５２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３５ Emissions Controls Exhaust Emissions Controls The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engine’s combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems. PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter The PGM-FI system uses sequential multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions. The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Ignition Timing Control System This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned. 330 Replacement Parts The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Honda replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle. The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more information. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５１：５９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３６ Three Way Catalytic Converter The three way catalytic converter contains precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converter is referred to as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Honda part or its equivalent. Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not running properly. THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicle’s three way catalytic converter. Technical Information The three way catalytic converter must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables. Keep the engine well maintained. Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective. 331 ０６／０８／１１ １８：１０：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３７ State Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes If you take your vehicle for a state emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4). 332 Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40° and 95°F. Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes). Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５２：１１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３８ Warranty and Customer Relations 333 Warranty and Customer Relations Customer Service Information ................................. 334 Warranty Coverages ..................... 335 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 336 Authorized Manuals ...................... 337 ０６／０８／１１ １８：１１：０４ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３３９ Customer Service Information Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership’s management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership’s management, contact your Honda Customer Service Office. U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 1919 Torrance Boulevard Torrance, California 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 999-1009 334 Canadian Owners: CUSTOMER RELATIONS RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE Honda Canada Inc. 715 Milner Avenue Toronto, ON M1B 2K8 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Toronto (416) 287-4776 When you call or write, please give us this information: Vehicle Identification Number (see page 320 ) Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle Date of purchase Mileage on your vehicle In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546 Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you ０６／０７／０５ １２：５２：２９ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４０ Warranty Coverages U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty − these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − this warranty gives up to 100 % credit toward a replacement battery. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty − all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit. Accessory Limited Warranty − Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty − covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship. Replacement Battery Limited Warranty − provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty − provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2007 Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet. Canadian Owners Please refer to the 2007 warranty manual that came with your vehicle. 335 Warranty and Customer Relations New Vehicle Limited Warranty − covers your new vehicle, except for the battery, emissions control systems, and accessories against defects in materials and workmanship. Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. ０６／０７／０７ １１：３９：０１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４１ Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc. 336 If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５２：４２ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４２ Authorized Manuals Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways: Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) Go online at www. helminc. com If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Publication Form Number 61SWA00 Form Description Price Each＊ $75.00 ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356 (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only) Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00 OR By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form. VEHICLE MODEL ２ ０ ０ ７ PUBLICATION NUMBER Price Total Each＊ Price Qty Name Year Ｈ Ｏ Ｎ ＊ Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please allow adequate time for delivery. TOTAL MATERIAL Mich. Purchases Add 6% Sales Tax HANDLING CHARGE $6.95 GRAND TOTAL 337 Authorized Manuals 2007 Honda CR-V Service Manual 61SWA00EL 2007 Honda CR-V $50.00 Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 62SWA30 2007 Honda CR-V $44.00 Body Repair Manual 31SWA600 2007 Honda CR-V $36.00 Owner’s Manual 31SWA800 2007 Honda CR-V $30.00 Navigation System Owner’s Manual 31SWAM00 2007 Honda CR-V $12.00 Honda Service History 31SWAQ00 2007 Honda CR-V $15.00 Quick Start Guide HON-R Order Form for Previous YearsFREE Indicate Year and Model Desired ＊ Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５２：５１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４３ Authorized Manuals NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name, and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown below for a quotation. Ｓ Ｈ Ｉ Ｐ Ｔ Ｏ Customer Name Attention Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number City State & Zip Code Daytime Telephone Number Ｐ Ａ Ｙ Ｍ Ｅ Ｎ Ｔ ( Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: This manual complements the service manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle. ) Body Repair Manual: This manual describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts. Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. Do not send cash Master Card VISA Check here if your billing address is different from the shipping address shown above. Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr. − CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14 days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order. P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356 338 Service Manual: This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand. ０６／０７／０５ １２：５２：５６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４４ Index A B Battery Charging System Indicator............................ 60, 309 Jump Starting ............................. 305 Maintenance ............................... 294 Specifications ............................. 323 Before Driving ............................... 213 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18 Beverage Holders .......................... 110 Booster Seats ................................... 51 Brakes Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 238 Break-in, New Linings .............. 214 Bulb Replacement ..................... 277 Fluid ............................................ 275 Parking .......................................... 78 System Indicator .................. 60, 311 System Design ........................... 237 Wear Indicators ......................... 237 Braking System.............................. 237 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 214 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 75 Brights, Headlights ................... 74, 75 Bulb Replacement Back-up Lights ........................... 281 Brake Lights............................... 281 Front Parking Lights ................. 280 Front Side Marker Lights......... 280 Headlights .................................. 277 High-mount Brake Light .......... 282 Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 281 Specifications ............................. 323 Turn Signal Lights ..................... 279 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 277 C Capacities Chart............................. 322 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54 CONTINUED I INDEX Accessories..................................... 220 ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Position) ........................................ 81 Accessory Power Sockets............. 117 Additives, Engine Oil..................... 268 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 78 Advanced Airbags............................ 27 Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 22 Air Conditioning System ............... 124 Usage .......................................... 125 Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 289 Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 214 Antifreeze ....................................... 270 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Indicator ................................ 61, 238 Operation .................................... 238 Anti-theft, Audio System............... 205 Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81 Audio System ................................. 129 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 84 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 20 Automatic Speed Control.............. 209 Automatic Transmission............... 231 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 322 Checking Fluid Level ................ 273 D3 Mode ...................................... 233 Shifting ........................................ 231 Shift Lever Position Indicators ................................ 231 Shift Lever Positions ................. 232 Shift Lock Release ..................... 235 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 204 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：００ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４５ Index Cargo ............................................... 222 Cargo area Light ............................ 121 Cargo Hooks .................................. 225 Carrying Cargo .............................. 222 Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 222 CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii CD Care .......................................... 202 CD Changer ........................... 154, 181 CD Changer Error Messages ............................ 159, 187 CD Error Messages .............. 159, 187 CD Player ....................... 135, 152, 172 Center Pocket ................................ 110 Center Table................................... 114 Certification Label ......................... 320 Chains, Tires .................................. 292 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 299 Changing Oil .................................. 267 How to ......................................... 267 When to....................................... 263 Charging System Message..... 60, 309 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............. 216 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 229 Child Safety ...................................... 34 Booster Seats ............................... 51 Child Seats .............................. 34, 39 II Important Safety Reminders ...... 34 Infants ........................................... 39 Large Children ............................. 50 LATCH.......................................... 43 Risks with Airbags....................... 35 Small Children.............................. 40 Tethers.......................................... 48 Warning Labels ............................ 36 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 35 Child Seats .................................. 34, 39 LATCH.......................................... 43 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 48 Childproof Door Locks ................... 88 Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 283 Clock ............................................... 206 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 329 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 230 Consumer Information＊................ 334 Controls, Instruments and .............. 57 Conversation Mirror ..................... 117 Coolant Adding ......................................... 270 Checking ..................................... 218 Proper Solution .......................... 270 Temperature Gauge .................... 69 Courtesy Light ............................... 121 Crankcase Emissions Control System......................................... 329 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 62 Cruise Control Operation ............. 209 Customer Service Office .............. 334 D DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii Dashboard .................................... 4, 72 Daytime Running Lights................. 75 Daytime Running Lights Indicator ........................................ 63 Dead Battery .................................. 305 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 336 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77 Defrosting the Windows ............... 128 Detachable Anchor........................ 104 Dimensions ..................................... 322 Dimming the Headlights .......... 74, 75 Dipstick Automatic Transmission........... 273 Engine Oil ................................... 218 Directional Signals ........................... 74 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 237 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 269 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：０５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４６ Index Doors Auto Door Lock ........................... 84 Auto Door Unlock........................ 86 Childproof Door Locks ............... 88 Locking and Unlocking ............... 84 Power Door Locks ....................... 82 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 324 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Driving ............................................ 227 Economy ..................................... 219 Driving Guidelines ......................... 228 D3 Mode .......................................... 233 Dual Deck Cargo Shelf ................. 111 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 284 E F Fan, Interior.................................... 125 Features .......................................... 123 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 215 Filters Dust and Pollen .......................... 284 Oil ................................................ 268 Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 76 Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 299 Fluids Automatic Transmission........... 273 Brake ........................................... 275 Power Steering........................... 276 Windshield Washer ................... 272 Folding Rear Seat .................... 99, 102 Four-way Flashers ........................... 76 Front Airbags ............................... 9, 25 Front Seat Adjusting ....................................... 94 Heaters........................................ 105 Airbags ...................................... 9, 25 INDEX Economy, Fuel ............................... 219 Emergencies................................... 297 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 305 Brake System Indicator ............ 311 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 299 Charging System Indicator ...... 309 Checking the Fuses................... 312 Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 76 Jump Starting ............................. 305 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 309 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 310 Overheated Engine ................... 307 Towing ........................................ 317 Emergency Brake ............................ 78 Emergency Flashers ....................... 76 Emergency Towing ....................... 317 Emissions Controls........................ 329 Emissions Testing, State .............. 332 Engine Adding Engine Coolant ............. 270 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 69 If It Won’t Start .......................... 303 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ................................. 60, 310 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 60, 309 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 267 Overheating................................ 307 Specifications ............................. 322 Speed Limiter ............................. 234 Starting........................................ 230 Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 214 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 329 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 54 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Belts by ......................................... 16 CONTINUED III ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：１０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４７ Index Fuel .................................................. 214 Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 216 Fill Door and Cap....................... 215 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 63 Gauge ............................................ 66 Octane Requirement ................. 214 Oxygenated ................................ 214 Tank, Refueling ......................... 215 Fuel Economy ................................ 219 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 312 G Gas Mileage, Improving................ 219 Gasohol ........................................... 214 Gasoline .......................................... 214 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 63 Gauge ............................................ 69 Octane Requirement ................. 214 Tank, Refueling ......................... 215 Gas Station Procedures................. 215 Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature .... 69 Fuel ................................................ 69 Gearshift Lever Positions Automatic Transmission........... 231 IV Glove Box ....................................... 114 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .............................. 246, 322 H Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 277 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 76 Headlights Aiming ......................................... 277 Daytime Running Lights............. 75 High Beam Indicator ................... 63 Reminder Chime .......................... 75 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 277 Turning on .................................... 74 Head Restraints ............................... 97 Heated Mirrors .............................. 109 Heater, Seat .................................... 105 Heating and Cooling ...................... 124 High Beam Lever............................. 74 Hood, Opening the ........................ 217 Horn............................................... 4, 72 I Identification Number, Vehicle.... 320 Ignition Keys............................................... 79 Switch ............................................ 81 Timing Control System ............. 330 Immobilizer System......................... 80 Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Indicators ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 61, 238 Brake (Parking and Brake System) ............................. 60, 311 Charging System ................. 60, 309 Cruise Control .............................. 62 DRL (Daytime Running Lights)....................................... 63 High Beam .................................... 63 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 61 Low Fuel ....................................... 63 Low Oil Pressure ................. 60, 309 Low Tire Pressure ............... 64, 242 Maintenance Minder........... 65, 257 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ................................. 60, 310 Passenger Airbag Off .................. 32 Side Airbag Off ............................ 61 SRS ................................................ 61 TPMS .................................... 64, 243 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：１６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４８ Index Turn Signal and Hazard Warning .................................... 63 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) ............................... 62, 240 Washer Level ............................... 65 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59 Infant Restraint ................................ 39 Infant Seats ....................................... 39 Tether Anchorage Point ............. 48 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 288 Recommended Pressures ......... 289 Inside Mirror .................................. 108 Inspection, Tire .............................. 290 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42 Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 75 Instruments and Controls ............... 57 Interior Lights ................................ 119 Introduction ......................................... i J Keys ................................................... 79 L Label, Certification ........................ 320 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 74 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19 LATCH Anchorage System............ 43 Lights Bulb Replacement ..................... 277 Indicator ........................................ 59 Parking .......................................... 74 Turn Signal ................................... 74 Load Limits..................................... 223 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81 Locks Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81 Childproof Door ........................... 88 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 215 Glove Box ........................... 114, 115 Power Door .................................. 82 Tailgate ......................................... 92 Low Coolant Level ......................... 218 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 63 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 309 Lower Anchors................................. 43 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 323 Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 222 Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 225 M Maintenance ................................... 255 Minder ................................. 257-263 Main Items and Sub Items ....... 260 Owner’s Maintenance Checks .................................... 262 Record .................................. 264-265 Minder Indicator .......................... 65 Safety........................................... 256 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 60, 310 Meters, Gauges.......................... 59, 66 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 214 Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 108 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 221 Moonroof ........................................ 107 INDEX Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 300 Jack, Tire ........................................ 301 Jump Starting ................................. 305 K CONTINUED V ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：２１ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３４９ Index N Neutral Gear Position.................... 233 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 214 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Numbers, Identification ................ 320 O Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 214 Odometer .......................................... 69 Odometer, Trip ................................ 67 Off-Highway Driving ..................... 252 Oil Change, How to ......................... 268 Change, When to ....................... 263 Checking Engine ....................... 218 Pressure Indicator ............... 60, 309 Selecting Proper Viscosity Chart ....................................... 267 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 81 Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery ..................................... 329 Outside Mirrors ............................. 109 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 69 Overheating, Engine ..................... 307 VI Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 262 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 214 P Panel Brightness Control ............... 75 Park Gear Position......................... 232 Parking ............................................ 236 Parking Brake .................................. 78 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator .................. 60, 311 Parking Lights.................................. 74 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 236 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 32 PGM-FI System.............................. 330 Pollen Filter .................................... 284 Power Door Locks ........................... 82 Power Socket Locations................ 117 Power Steering Fluid ..................... 276 Power Windows ............................. 106 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16 Preparing to Drive ......................... 229 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 Protecting Children ......................... 34 Protecting Infants ........................ 39 Protecting Larger Children ........ 50 Protecting Small Children .......... 40 Using Child Seats with Tethers...................................... 48 Using LATCH .............................. 43 R Radiator Overheating .................... 307 Radio/CD Sound System .............. 129 Radio Theft Protection.................. 205 Readiness Codes ............................ 310 Rear Differential Fluid .................. 275 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 281 Rear Seat, Folding ................... 99, 102 Rear View Mirror........................... 108 Rear Window Defogger .................. 77 Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 74 Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 94 Refueling ......................................... 215 Reminder Indicators ........................ 59 Remote Transmitter ........................ 89 Replacement Information Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 284 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：２６ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３５０ Index Engine Oil and Filter ................. 268 Fuses ........................................... 312 Light Bulbs ................................. 277 Schedule ..................................... 263 Tires ............................................ 288 Wiper Blades .............................. 285 Replacing Seat Belts After a Crash ............................................. 21 Reporting Safety Defects＊ ........... 336 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant ................................ 218, 270 Restraint, Child ................................ 34 Reverse Gear Position................... 232 Reverse Lockout ............................ 235 Roof Rack ....................................... 224 Rotation, Tire ................................. 291 S How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works ....................... 31 Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work.......................................... 30 Side Marker Lights, Bulb Replacement ............................... 280 Signaling Turns ................................ 74 Snow Tires ...................................... 292 Sound System ................................. 129 Spare Tire ....................................... 298 Spark Plugs ..................................... 322 Specifications ......................... 322, 323 Speed Control ................................. 209 Speed Limiter ................................. 234 INDEX Safety Belts................................... 8, 18 Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 336 Safety Features .................................. 7 Airbags ............................................ 9 Seat Belts ........................................ 8 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 55 Safety Messages ............................... iii Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18 Additional Information ................ 18 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................................ 20 Cleaning ...................................... 283 Detachable Anchor.................... 104 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19 Maintenance ................................. 20 Reminder Indicator and Beeper ....................................... 60 System Components.................... 18 Use During Pregnancy................ 16 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14 Seat Heaters ................................... 105 Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 94 Select/Reset Button ........................ 66 Serial Number ................................ 320 Service Intervals ............................ 263 Service Manual＊ ............................ 337 Service Station Procedures .......... 215 Setting the Clock ........................... 206 Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 231 Shift Lock Release ......................... 235 Side Airbags ................................. 9, 28 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 CONTINUED VII ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：３０ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３５１ Index SRS, Additional Information........... 22 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Airbag Service .............................. 33 Airbag System Components ....... 22 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works ....................... 31 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 31 How Your Front Airbags Work.......................................... 25 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work.......................................... 30 SRS Indicator.............................. 31, 61 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 81 Starting the Engine........................ 230 In Cold Weather at High Altitude ................................... 230 With a Dead Battery ................. 303 State Emissions Testing ............... 332 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 307 Steering Wheel Adjustment ................................... 78 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81 Steering Wheel Buttons........ 203, 209 Stereo Sound System .................... 129 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 295 VIII Sun Visor......................................... 116 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 116 Supplemental Restraint System................................... 9, 22 Servicing ....................................... 33 SRS Indicator.......................... 31, 61 System Components.................... 22 Synthetic Oil ................................... 268 T Table Center ......................................... 114 Tailgate Open Indicator ............................. 63 Opening the .................................. 92 Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 281 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 297 Technical Descriptions DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 324 Emissions Control Systems ...... 329 Oxygenated Fuels...................... 214 Three Way Catalytic Converter ................................ 331 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)-Required Federal Explaration ......................... 327 Temperature Gauge ........................ 69 Temperature, Outside ..................... 69 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 48 Theft Protection, Radio................. 205 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 326 Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 78 Time, Setting the ........................... 206 Tire Chains ..................................... 292 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 299 Tire Information ............................ 324 Tires ................................................ 287 Air Pressure ............................... 289 Chains ......................................... 292 Checking Wear .......................... 290 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 324 Inflation ....................................... 288 Inspection ................................... 290 Labeling ...................................... 326 Low Tire Pressure Indicator............................ 64, 242 Maintenance ............................... 290 Pressure Monitoring System ... 243 Replacing .................................... 291 ０６／０７／０５ １２：５３：３５ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３５２ Index Turn Signals ..................................... 74 U Unexpected, Taking Care of the ........................................... 297 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 324 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 214 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 269 V Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 223 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 322 Vehicle Identification Number..... 320 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System..................................... 240 Indicators ...................................... 62 Vehicle Storage .............................. 295 Ventilation ...................................... 126 VIN .................................................. 320 Viscosity, Oil................................... 267 W Warning Labels, Location of .......... 55 Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 335 Washers, Windshield Checking the Fluid Level ......... 272 Operation ...................................... 73 Wheels Adjusting the Steering ................ 78 Alignment and Balance ............. 291 Wrench, Nut ............................... 300 Windows Auto Reverse .............................. 106 Operating the Power ................. 106 Rear, Defogger ............................ 77 Windshield Cleaning ........................................ 73 Defroster .................................... 128 Washers ...................................... 272 Wipers, Windshield Changing Blades ........................ 285 Operation ...................................... 73 Worn Tires ..................................... 290 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 317 ＊ INDEX Rotating....................................... 291 Snow ............................................ 292 Specifications ............................. 323 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 299 Towing A Trailer ...................................... 245 Behind a Motorhome ................ 250 Emergency Wrecker ................. 317 Equipment and Accessories ..... 247 Pre-Tow Checklist ..................... 248 Weight Limit .............................. 245 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ................................... 242 Indicator ................................ 64, 242 Required Federal Explanation............................. 327 Trailer Loading ...................... 245, 246 Trailer Towing Tips....................... 248 Transmission Checking Fluid Level, Automatic ............................... 273 Fluid Selection............................ 273 Identification Number............... 320 Shifting the Automatic .............. 231 Treadwear ...................................... 324 Trip Meter ........................................ 67 : U.S. only WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii IX ０６／０７／０５ １５：３０：０８ ３１ＳＷＡ６００ ０３５３ Service Information Summary Gasoline: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 87 or higher. Fuel Tank Capacity: 15.3 US gal (58 ) Recommended Engine Oil: API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page 267 ). Oil change capacity (including filter): 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Automatic Transmission Fluid: Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) preferred, or a DEXRON III ATF as a temporary replacement (see page 273 ). On 4WD model only Rear Differential Fluid: Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do not use ATF. Capacity: 1.3 US qt (1.2 ) Power Steering Fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid preferred, or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Do not use ATF (see page 276 ). Brake Fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page 275 ). Tire Pressure (measured cold): Front/Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) Compact Spare Tire: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )